Secret To Craps Rev01 PDF

The Secret to Craps:
The Right Way to Play

http://www.learnthesecrettocraps.com
by
William J. Enslen, Jr.
Copyright 2006 by William J. Enslen, Jr. All rights reserved. Any use - including the reproduction, modification, distribution, transmission,
republication, or display - of the content is strictly prohibited.
Disclaimer: Information provided is for educational purposes only. By ordering, you agree to hold the author harmless for any and all liability for
any loss or losses which may be incurred by any person or persons using the whole or part of the contents of this book.
Table of Contents
Introduction...................................................................................................... 1
Chapter 1: Craps Math 101.............................................................................. 4
Chapter 2: The Crew........................................................................................ 11
Chapter 3: The Table and Equipment.............................................................. 14
Chapter 4: The Table Layout........................................................................... 17
Chapter 5: Approach the Table........................................................................ 20
Chapter 6: Roll the Dice.................................................................................. 26
Chapter 7: Dice Setting................................................................................... 31
Chapter 8: Basic Play and Types of Bets........................................................ 39
Chapter 9: Good Bet or Bad Bet?................................................................... 94
Chapter 10: The Secret to Craps..................................................................... 105
Chapter 11: Winning Systems (Hogwash!).................................................... 127
Chapter 12: Tokes and What They Can Do for You...................................... 134
Chapter 13: Watch Your Bets and Payoffs..................................................... 141
Chapter 14: Etiquette and Superstitions......................................................... 144
Chapter 15: Wash Your Hands...................................................................... 148
Chapter 16: Craps Lingo................................................................................ 151
List of Figures
Figure 4-1. Craps Table Layout, Side Section................................................. 18
Figure 4-2. Craps Table Layout, Center Section............................................. 19
Figure 5-1. Player Positions............................................................................. 23
Figure 7-1. Pyramid Rubber on the Back Wall of the Table........................... 34
Figure 7-2. Close-up of the Pointy Rubber Pyramids on the Back Wall........ 35
Figure 8-1. Flat Pass Line Bet......................................................................... 43
Figure 8-2. Pass Line with Odds Bets............................................................. 45
Figure 8-3. Right and Wrong Ways to Stack Chips........................................ 46
Figure 8-4. Location of the Dont Pass with Odds Bets................................. 52
Figure 8-5. Bridging the Dont Pass Odds Bet............................................ 55
Figure 8-6. Heeling the Dont Pass Odds Bet............................................. 56
Figure 8-7. Locations of Come Bets............................................................... 62
Figure 8-8. Locations of Dont Come Bets.................................................... 67
Figure 8-9. Locations of Place Bets............................................................... 72
Figure 8-10. Locations of Buy Bets............................................................... 81
Figure 8-11. Straddling the C&E Bet............................................................ 91
The Secret to Craps: The Right Way to Play
Introduction 1
Introduction
Why would anyone pay good money for a craps book when hundreds of Internet
websites explain the game for free? Seems stupid, doesnt it? Lets be honest, if you
simply want to learn the basics of the game, you shouldnt have bought this book. You
could have read the free websites and saved your money for the tables (youll certainly
need it if you play without the knowledge gained from this book).
Craps is undoubtedly the most exciting casino game. Walk around the casino and
observe people playing other games. Youll quickly realize that the craps table is where
the action is. Its where you routinely hear people clapping and screaming. Its where
you see them jumping up and down, hugging and high-fiving their playing partners. Not
only is craps the most fun to play, it also offers one of the lowest house advantages of any
casino game, if played correctly. Playing correctly means you know what bets to make,
when to make them, how much to bet, and what bets to avoid giving you the optimal mix
of essential variables: smart play, betting action, fun, and excitement. Although important
to preserving your bankroll, making correct bets with the lowest house advantage is
only a prerequisite to my secret for playing the game correctly.
Contrary to what you probably read in other books and Internet articles, craps is
designed for the casino to win and the player to lose. Over time, the player always loses.
The knowledgeable player knows hes supposed to lose, so he plays for fun and
excitement. He hopes, but doesnt expect to win. The secret is to find the optimal mix of
variables that allows you to walk away with something left in your pocket and be happy
that you didnt lose it all. The secret allows you to play longer, lose less, and leave in a
good mood. You might even leave a winner, making your gambling vacation even
sweeter.
Ive played craps regularly my entire adult life. In my earlier days, I read lots of
books and, when the Internet came along, I browsed lots of websites. They all explain the
game basics and offer sure-fire winning strategies. They all explain what to do at a craps
table, but none effectively explain how or why. Thats where this book is different. It
takes you on an exciting journey into the why and how of the game. Other books
typically describe fundamentals but fail to define the details that allow a player to become
truly knowledgeable in all aspects of the game.
This book doesnt give false hope. It doesnt promise you can beat the house out
of ga-zillions of dollars. It doesnt offer wacky dice-setting schemes to overcome the
house advantage. It does, however, explain the math so you can easily understand that the
game is designed for you to lose. The math proves that no so-called winning system
will ever beat the house over time. This book also challenges the silly notion that a player
can affect the outcome of a craps decision by mastering dice control. The fact is that
theres no true winning strategy for craps. Dont be fooled. Dont be one of the countless
Introduction 2
losers who walk up to the table, drop $200 in front of the dealer, bet according to some
fancy-sounding system, then walk away mad and broke 45 minutes later. The game has a
built-in house advantage that, over time, no one can beat. Over time, the casino always
wins. This comprehensive understanding allows you to enjoy the game without worrying
about winning.
You think, If Im going to lose, why should I bother playing? Good question.
This book has the answer. As well discuss later, craps is based entirely on odds, which
implies that, as time increases, the results approach a perfect distribution. Although the
house has a built-in advantage even in a perfect distribution, we play anyway because of
the hope that in the relatively short time we play, well hit a variance in the distribution,
an anomaly, where the odds seem to take a vacation and favor us instead of the house.
When that time finally comes, everything we do is right. The air is pure, the sun is
shining, theres peace on Earth. But how do we time it just right to hit that short-lived
variance where everything goes our way and we end up needing a wheelbarrow to carry
all our chips to the cage? After many hours of play, Ive discovered what I consider my
secret to craps. The secret isnt one of the ga-zillion phony systems that seldom wins
and often loses. The secret is explained later in this book.
Not only will you learn the game basics and my secret to craps, youll also learn
many tidbits of knowledge that will allow you to approach a table with confidence and
look like an experienced player, even if its the first time youve ever dropped money on
the table. After all my reading, its apparent to me that few written materials--books or
Internet articles--provide the nitty-gritty details of all aspects of the game. All craps
books define the basics, such as table layout, types of bets, good versus bad bets, money
management, and bogus winning strategies. But few books give the details a player needs
to truly understand the game and be a respected player. The game is much more fun if the
crew and other players respect you as a knowledgeable player than if they see you as just
another sucker. This book gives you those details. I also include anecdotes that add to the
fun of learning the secret to craps.
Whats the secret? If the game is designed for players to lose, why do
knowledgeable players bother with it? How do knowledgeable players find the optimal
mix of essential variables that allows them to walk away with a smile? The secret is in
this book.
Lets get started. Lets first learn the game, and then how to minimize your losses
and maximize your wins. I recommend starting at the beginning because, even though the
early chapters explain game fundamentals that you may already understand, they probably
include something you dont yet know. Remember, this book goes into details to explain
more than simply what to do. It explains the how and why. So, start at the
beginning. Otherwise, its like learning to read before learning the alphabet.
Im sure youve heard of the Latin saying, Scientia est potentia (knowledge is
power). In craps, knowledge is money. I like taking it a step further and saying, More
Introduction 3
knowledge is more money. If you understand that concept, youll be eager to soak up all
the game details that youre about to learn.
History of Craps
Dice and dice games date back to the Crusades, but modern craps is only about
100 years old. Modern craps evolved from the ancient English game called Hazard. No
one knows for sure the origin of the game, but Hazard is said to have been created by the
Englishman, Sir William of Tyre, in the 12th century. Its believed that Sir Williams
knights played Hazard during a siege on the castle Hazarth in 1125 AD. The name
Hazard was derived from the castles name.
Early French settlers brought the game Hazard to Canada (the colony of Acadia,
which is Nova Scotia today). In the 1700s, when displaced by the British, the French
moved south and found refuge in southern Louisiana where they eventually became
Cajuns. When they left Acadia, they took their favorite game, Hazard, with them. The
Cajuns simplified the game and made it more mathematically fair. Its said that the
Cajuns changed the name to craps, which was derived from the name of the losing throw
of 2 in the game of Hazard, known as crabs.
From Louisiana, the game spread to the Mississippi riverboats and across the
country. Many consider the dice maker John H. Winn as the father of modern craps. In
1907, Winn created the modern craps layout. He added the Dont Pass line so players can
bet on the dice to lose. Later, he created the boxes for Place bets and added the Big 6,
Big 8, and Hardways.
Chapter 1: Craps Math 101 4
Chapter 1
Craps Math 101
Craps is a dice game that uses two dice. The dots on a die are called pips. (A
pip is simply a dot that represents numerical value, as on a die or a domino.) After rolling
the dice, add the face-up value of the pips on both dice to determine the value of the
two-dice roll. Thirty-six combinations of numbers can be rolled with two dice, as shown
in Table 1-1.
Table 1-1. Possible Two-Dice Combinations

DIE #1 DIE #2 TOTAL DIE #1 DIE #2 TOTAL
1 1 2 4 1 5
1 2 3 4 2 6
1 3 4 4 3 7
1 4 5 4 4 8
1 5 6 4 5 9
1 6 7 4 6 10
2 1 3 5 1 6
2 2 4 5 2 7
2 3 5 5 3 8
2 4 6 5 4 9
2 5 7 5 5 10
2 6 8 5 6 11
3 1 4 6 1 7
3 2 5 6 2 8
3 3 6 6 3 9
3 4 7 6 4 10
3 5 8 6 5 11
3 6 9 6 6 12
As shown, the possible values for a single two-dice roll are from 2 to 12. Its
important to memorize the number of ways to make each number, 2 through 12. This is
especially important for beginners because this basic information is used, for example, to
determine how much Odds on the point to take or lay. (The terms Odds, point,
take, and lay may be foreign to you now, but before you finish this book, youll
understand more craps lingo than youll probably ever use.)
Table 1-2a summarizes the results of Table 1-1 and provides a quick-look at the
number of possible combinations for each value of a two-dice roll (in other words, the
number of ways to make each number). For example, suppose you want to know how
many ways there are to make a 12. Using Table 1-1, count the number of times 12
appears in the TOTAL column. You find theres only one way to make a 12 (a 6 on
die #1 and a 6 on die #2). Another example, suppose you want to know how many ways
there are to make a 9. Using Table 1-1, you find there are four ways to make a 9 (count
the number of times 9 appears in the TOTAL columns, which is four times).
Table 1-2a. Ways to Make a Number When Rolling Two Dice

TWO-DICE VALUE # OF WAYS TO MAKE IT
2 1
3 2
4 3
5 4
6 5
7 6
8 5
9 4
10 3
11 2
12 1
Table 1-2b on the next page illustrates in a different format (as commonly seen in
many craps-related books and Internet websites) the number of ways to make each
number.
Table 1-2b. Ways to Make a Number When Rolling Two Dice

# OF WAYS TO
TWO-DICE VALUE TWO-DICE COMBINATION
MAKE IT
2 [1-1] 1
3 [1-2] [2-1] 2
4 [2-2] [1-3] [3-1] 3
5 [1-4] [4-1] [2-3] [3-2] 4
6 [3-3] [1-5] [5-1] [2-4] [4-2] 5
7 [1-6] [6-1] [2-5] [5-2] [3-4] [4-3] 6
8 [4-4] [2-6] [6-2] [3-5] [5-3] 5
9 [3-6] [6-3] [4-5] [5-4] 4
10 [5-5] [4-6] [6-4] 3
11 [5-6] [6-5] 2
12 [6-6] 1
You dont want to look like an inexperienced newbie in front of the dealers. One
way to immediately show that you dont have a clue is to fumble around with how much
Odds to take or lay on the point. Instead, you should know it by heart, without even
thinking about it. Otherwise, the dealers will immediately recognize your inexperience
and offer to help you by suggesting what bets to make and how much to bet. Generally,
if you take their advice, your chip stack will suffer. Even when dealers are genuinely on
your side rooting for you to win (the more you win, the better their chances youll tip
them), theyll typically ask if you want to make Hardway or proposition bets that have
high house advantages. Not knowing what to do, youll sheepishly reply, Yeah, how
much is the Hard four? Oh, only a dollar? Okay. Youll toss in your $1 chip and a few
rolls later, youll lose. Thats one less chip in your stack.
Craps is easy, so dont let all the numbers and odds scare you. After you play for a
while, its as simple as adding two plus two. Lets look at an easy method to remember
how many ways to make each number.
Notice in Table 1-2a and Table 1-2b that there are six ways to make a 7, five ways
to make either a 6 or 8, four ways to make a 5 or 9, three ways to make a 4 or 10, two
ways to make a 3 or 11, and one way to make a 2 or 12. Note that, except for the 7, all the
numbers are paired according to how many ways to make them. So, first memorize the
pairings. Lets build a table to help us memorize it.
Table 1-3a. Ways to Make a Number by Pairings

Pairings
7
6 or 8
5 or 9
4 or 10
3 or 11
2 or 12
As you can see in Table 1-3a, the pairings are:

6 pairs with 8 (remember 6-8)
2 pairs with 12 (remember 2-12).
Its interesting to note in Table 1-3a that the first number of each pairing as we go
down the rows decreases by one (i.e., 6, 5, 4, 3, and 2). The second number of each
pairing as we go down the rows increases by one (i.e., 8, 9, 10, 11, and 12).
Next, subtract one from the low number of each pairing, as shown in Table 1-3b.
Table 1-3b. Ways to Make a Number by Pairings

Pairings Low # - 1
7 7-1=6
6 or 8 6-1=5
5 or 9 5-1=4
4 or 10 4-1=3
3 or 11 3-1=2
2 or 12 2-1=1
Very good! See how easy this is? You just calculated the number of ways to
make each number when rolling two six-sided dice, as shown in Table 1-3c.
Table 1-3c. Ways to Make a Number by Pairings

Pairings Low # - 1 Ways to Make It
7 7-1=6 6
6 or 8 6-1=5 5
5 or 9 5-1=4 4
4 or 10 4-1=3 3
3 or 11 3-1=2 2
2 or 12 2-1=1 1
Lets see if youre paying attention. Quickly, how many ways to make a 4? If you
cant memorize it, do the math. The pairing is 4 pairs with 10, and 4 is the low number
of the pairing, so 4 - 1 = 3. Therefore, there are three ways to make a 4. Lets do one
more. Quickly, how many ways to make an 8? Excellent! Youre a natural at this! The
pairing is 6 pairs with 8, and 6 is the low number of the pairing, so 6 - 1 = 5. Therefore,
there are five ways to make an 8.
Again, the basic information contained in Table 1-2 is important, so memorize it.
Do it now. Dont continue reading until you memorize the number of ways to make each
number. If you cant memorize it, then memorize the pairings and do the simple math
trick explained above to figure it out.
With all the emphasis I place on learning the number of ways to make each
number, its obvious that craps is a game of odds, comparing possible winning
combinations to possible losing combinations. For example, suppose we want to compare
the number 7 to the number 4. 4 is our favorite number, so we bet on 4 instead of 7.
Therefore, our bet wins if a 4 shows and loses if a 7 shows. Assume that all other
numbers dont matter, so we ignore them and keep rolling until either a 4 shows (we win)
or a 7 shows (we lose). Lets bet $1 and assume its an even-money bet, which means if
we lose, we lose the $1, and if we win, we win $1. The odds for this even-money bet are
expressed as 1:1 (stated as one to one). An even-money bet, or a 1:1 bet, means for
each unit we bet and win, we receive that exact amount (e.g., if we bet $5 and win, we win
$5; if we bet $8 and win, we win $8). Is betting the 4 against the 7 for even money a good
bet? No way! Its a terrible bet because we have twice as many chances of losing than
winning.
From Table 1-3c, we see there are six ways to make a 7, and only three ways to
make a 4. That means there are twice as many ways for us to lose as there are for us to
win. So, making this even-money bet is not only terrible, its stupid.
But 4 is our favorite number and we want to bet it, so is there any circumstance
where betting the 4 against the 7 is a good bet? Yes, of course. When betting the 4
against the 7, we take a much greater risk because there are twice as many ways to lose as
there are to win, so we want to be compensated for taking that risk. Were compensated
by getting odds on the 4, which means if we bet $1 and win, then we expect to win more
than our $1 bet. But how much more? Its simple, so dont fear the math. Again, there
are six ways to make a 7 and three ways to make a 4. The comparison of those outcomes
is expressed as 6:3. This expression is like a fraction, so we reduce the expression to 2:1.
Therefore, we expect to get 2:1 odds when betting the 4 against the 7. If our $1 bet wins,
we expect to win two times our $1 bet, which is $2 (i.e., $1 x 2 = $2). If, for example, we
bet $3 on the 4 against the 7 and win, we expect to win two times our $3 bet, which is $6
(i.e., $3 x 2 = $6).
To illustrate this further, lets roll the dice 36 times and assume the results are
distributed exactly according to the number of ways to make each number (i.e., a perfect
distribution). We know there are six ways to make a 7 and three ways to make a 4. For
an even-money bet, if we bet $1 on the 4 against the 7 on each of the 36 rolls and the
distribution of results is perfect, we expect to win $1 three times and lose $1 six times.
So, for an even-money bet, our net result is a $3 loss.
Lets use the same example except, this time, we get 2:1 odds when we bet the 4
against the 7. If we again bet $1 on each of the 36 rolls, we expect to win $2 three times
and lose $1 six times. Therefore, for a 2:1 Odds bet, our net result is that we break even,
as we expect (i.e., we win $2 x 3 = $6, and we lose $1 x 6 = $6).
If everything balances out after a long period of time with a large quantity of dice
rolls, how does the casino make money? How can they build those multi-billion-dollar
casinos? They screw us, thats how! And they dont feel the least bit guilty about it.
Earlier, I mentioned house advantage. Thats a politically correct term for were going
to screw you until we take all your money. The house (i.e., the casino) takes a set
percentage out of every possible bet (except the free Odds bet, which well discuss later).
They do it several ways, but the best way to illustrate this concept is to compare the
results of making a Place bet on the number 4 or 10. (Well look at Place bets and all
other bet types later.)
Since 4 is our favorite number, lets look at Place betting the 4 against the 7. As
we know from Table 1-3c, there are three ways to make a 4. If we Place bet $5 on the
4 against the 7, we expect to win $10 (remember, we expect to get 2:1 odds on the 4, so
we should expect to get $5 x 2 = $10 when we win a $5 bet). Ready? Here it comes!
Instead of giving 2:1 odds for a Place bet on the 4 against the 7, the house gives
odds of only 9:5. Ouch! That means, when we bet $5 and win, we receive only $9
instead of the $10 we expect. Theyve screwed us out of that extra dollar that we should
have gotten based on the true odds of 2:1.
Using the 36-roll perfect-distribution example again, we find that the house is
making tons of money off suckers like us. For each of the 36 rolls, suppose we bet $5 on
the 4 against the 7, and the odds are only 9:5 instead of the 10:5 true odds that we expect
to get (i.e., the expression 10:5 equals 2:1). That means, for each losing roll, we lose $5,
and for each winning roll, we win $9. After 36 rolls with a perfect distribution, we expect
to lose six times for a total of $30 (6 x $5 = $30), and we expect to win three times for a
total of $27 (3 x $9 = $27). The net result is that we lose $3, even with a perfect
distribution.
Its easy to see how the casinos profits add up over time. In this example of a
Place bet on the number 4, they screw us out of a dollar by not giving the full true odds of
10:5 (again, 10:5 equals 2:1). Consider all the people playing craps 24 hours a day, seven
days a week, 52 weeks a year. All those dollars add up to millions.
The house advantage varies among the many different types of possible craps bets.
Well discuss them all later and youll learn which bets have high house advantages (or
edges) and which have relatively small house edges. Obviously, you want to avoid the
bets with the higher house edges and focus on those with the smallest. Be advised, simply
knowing which bets are smarter than others isnt the secret to craps!
In later chapters, well go a bit deeper into the math to understand why certain bets
are considered better than others and why the casino cant lose. Dont worry; you dont
need to be rocket scientist to understand it.
Now that we have a basic understanding of odds and their importance to
understanding craps, the next step is to become familiar with the crew and table.
Chapter 2: The Crew 11
Chapter 2
The Crew
New shooter, coming out! Place your bets. Money plays to the table limit.
Hardways work unless you call them off. Get your C and Es, Horns, and Whirls. No
more bets, the dice are ready!
Huh? Whos that guy and what did he say?
A live, normal-size craps table (i.e., not a rare mini-craps table) is manned by
four people: one boxman, two dealers, and one stickman. Sometimes, the stickman is
referred to as a third dealer. Actually, four dealers are assigned to a table, but they rotate
about every 20 minutes, so a table has three dealers working with the fourth dealer on
break.
Boxman
The boxman is the table boss. She sits in the middle of one side of the table
directly in front of all the casinos chips.
Casino personnel usually refer to chips as cheques, which is of French origin.
Technically, theres a difference between a chip and a cheque. A cheque is a chip with a
denomination printed on it and is always worth the value of the imprinted denomination.
Chips, however, dont have denominations imprinted on them and any color can be worth
any amount as defined by the dealer. For example, in a poker tournament, the dealer may
define white chips as $1 and blue chips as $10; whereas in a roulette game, the dealer may
define white chips as 25 cents and blue chips as $2. When you plop your money down on
the table and hear the dealer say, Cheque change only, hes simply telling the boxman
that a new player wants to exchange cash for chips (cheques), and that the cash on the
table is not in play. Cash plays in most casinos, so if you put a $5 bill on the Pass Line
just before the shooter rolls the dice and the dealer doesnt exchange your cash for chips,
your cash is live and in play. When the dealer says, Cheque change only, the
boxman knows that your cash is not in play.
The boxman watches everyone and everything. Her job is to ensure the game runs
properly. She watches the dealers to ensure they give the correct winnings, take down lost
bets, and dont cheat the players or casino. She also watches the players to ensure they
dont cheat the casino or other players. She acts as the referee for disagreements between
a player and dealer (e.g., a player may argue that the dealer paid incorrect odds, didnt pay
a bet, or made some other kind of mistake). She acts as a bouncer when players get out of
control and she can deny a player a position at the table for cursing too much, constantly
complaining about a slow dealer, or otherwise making the game less enjoyable for other
players. Your interaction with the boxman will typically be limited. She might say,
Hello, but thats about it. Her job is to focus on running the game properly, so she
minimizes distractions by leaving player interaction to the dealers and stickman.
When you drop your money on the table, the dealer picks it up and gives it to the
boxman. The boxman then places the money on the table as she counts it so the overhead
camera can see the total amount. After the count is complete, the boxman then stuffs the
cash into a narrow slot in the table where it falls into a metal box secured to the underside
of the table (thats how this person got the name boxman).
Dealers
The two dealers stand on either side of the boxman and handle players bets in the
side section. The dealer is like a bank teller, giving and taking money. When you win, he
pays you by putting your winning chips in front of you so you can easily reach them.
Conversely, when you lose, the dealer takes down your bets. If you approach the table
with high-denomination chips, such as $100, the dealer exchanges your $100 for $1 and
$5 chips.
A good, fun dealer can add much enjoyment to your game play. When the table is
packed and the numbers are running hot, its fun to watch a fast dealer with his arms
flying everywhere counting out chips and knowing exactly how many everyone gets. If
the table is cold with not much action, you can carry on a conversation with him. Hell
answer questions about the game or politely correct you if you make a mistake, such as
not putting down enough Odds on the point.
Most dealers are your friends and want you to win because players tips are how
they make most of their money. They earn minimum wage and rely on tips for their
livelihood. When a dealer auditions at a casino, personality and people skills are
considered more valuable than dealing skills. The casino knows a new dealers skills will
develop quickly, but more importantly, the casino knows that a polite and friendly dealer
makes the game more enjoyable for the casinos patrons. However, youll occasionally
run into a dealer whos having a bad day. Maybe he has a headache, or his feet hurt, or
hes hungry. The crew rotates typically every 20 minutes, so hell be gone soon and
another dealer will take his place.
Stickman
The stickman stands at the center of the table on the opposite side of the boxman
and dealers. She controls the pace of the game. She uses an L-shaped, wooden stick
(called a mop or a whip) to gather the dice after each roll and give them to the shooter
for the next roll. The stickman also manages the proposition bets, which well discuss
later. If a proposition bet wins, the stickman tells the dealer how much to pay the winner.
If a proposition bet loses, the stickman takes down the bet. When the stickmans chip
stack gets too big (usually about 20 chips), she hands them off to the boxman. The casino
doesnt want a lot of stacked chips on the table where the stickman works because its
easier for people to reach down and steal them.
The stickman calls each roll of the dice, usually adding banter that makes the game
more entertaining. Its fun to listen to a good stickman spouting craps jargon and amusing
rhymes. The stickman also tries to persuade players to make proposition bets that have a
high house advantage. A good stickman is a bonus for the casino because she can talk
people into making bigger bets than they normally would, as well as making proposition
bets that they normally wouldnt. Proposition bets and bigger bets mean one thing to the
casino--bigger profits.
Dont fall into the stickmans trap. She can be very tempting. Its okay to laugh at
her banter, but dont get sucked in. Simply say, No thanks. Dont let her talk you into
increasing your bets, making proposition bets, or making any other kind of bet that you
know you shouldnt make.
Mini-Craps
Rarely, youll see a mini-craps table, typically in small casinos. For mini-craps,
the game is the same, but the table is half normal size and accommodates only eight
players. Because the table is smaller, only one dealer is needed to run the game. That one
person performs the functions of the boxman, dealer, and stickman, which makes the
game slower than a normal game.
Chapter 3: The Table and Equipment 14
Chapter 3
The Table and Equipment
My heavens! What are all those squares and rectangles and numbers? How can
anyone understand all that? Relax. After 30 minutes of play, its easy as pie.
The Table
The craps table is 8, 9, 10, or 12 feet long (depending on the casinos
specifications), about five feet wide, and about three-and-a-half feet high. Along the top
rail are built-in chip racks for each player and an armrest for the players comfort while
leaning on their elbows. A shelf is along the bottom of the table for holding drinks, ash
trays, and whatever else a player may want to store there. In case youre wondering, a
typical 10-foot table weighs about 350 pounds and costs about $4,500.
Always put your drink glass or beer bottle on the bottom shelf directly in front of
where you stand at the table. Not to the side, not around the corner, not anywhere but
directly in front of you so your body protects it. I finally learned this lesson after about
the fifth time a drunk mistakenly took my beer or reached down for his cigarette and
accidentally knocked it over. Ladies, never give a thief an opportunity, so never put your
purse on the bottom shelf.
Dont lean over the table while drinking or sucking on a cigarette. No matter how
careful you are, theres a chance youll spill something or drop ashes on the table. Thats
a definite no-no. You wont be taken out back to have your hands smashed with a
hammer, but you interrupt the game for the crew to clean up your mess. Most of the time,
the crew politely asks you not to do it again, but the players likely wont be so nice,
especially if theres a drunk at the table. Because you interrupt the game, losers who need
someone to blame for their subsequent bad luck point their fingers at you. Therefore,
never put a drink on the chip rack or armrest; instead, put it on the bottom shelf.
Along the inside ends of the table are many little cushioned spikes (sometimes
called pyramids). The spikes ensure a random bounce so theres no way shooters can
control their dice throws.
A mirror runs along the inside of the table opposite the boxman. The mirror
simply helps the boxman control the game (i.e., gives her added visibility).
The casinos chips are neatly stacked on the table in front of the boxman, generally
20 chips high. Standard policy for all casinos is to protect the higher denomination
chips by stacking them in the center and surrounding them by the lower denomination
chips. Its harder for a thief to grab the higher denominations because theyre protected
by the lower denominations.
A money slot in the table bed is just in front of the right side of the casinos chip
stack within easy reach of the boxman. After the boxman counts a players cash, he sets it
over the slot and manually pushes it through with a block of acrylic plastic that fits
perfectly into the slot. The money then falls into the drop-box thats secured to the
underside of the table. The acrylic block has a handle thats a little bigger than the slot, so
it acts as a cover over the slot to prevent chips and dice from falling into the drop-box.
As many as 10 players can play at each end of the table, but typically, the boxman
limits the number of players on each end to eight. The chip racks on the railing are
sectioned off making it easy to recognize the player positions. When you approach the
table, find an unused chip rack and take that position. If its busy, youll have to squeeze
in wherever you can. If its dead, you can choose any position you want. Player
position #1 is next to the stickman. Each succeeding position goes around the table to
position #8, which is next to the dealer. After each roll, the dealer pays all bets in order,
starting with position #1 and ending with position #8.
The Puck
The on/off puck is a round plastic puck (looks like a hockey puck) thats white on
one side and black on the other. The white side has big, block letters that say ON. The
black side says OFF. Each dealer has a puck for his side of the table.
When the puck is OFF (black side up), it signifies to the players that a new game is
about to start. When the puck is ON (white side up), it signifies a game is in progress and
identifies the point (discussed later). When a point is established, the dealer places the
puck white-side-up on the point box for that number. When a shooter loses and the
game ends, the dealer removes the puck from the point box and places it black-side-up at
the end of the table.
The Dice
Casino craps dice are perfect squares with sharp corners (unlike standard toy dice
with rounded edges) and are typically red, but may be any color in accordance with the
casinos specifications. The casinos logo is usually imprinted on each die. Each die also
has a small number or other code that identifies the specific dice that the casino uses for
that particular day. If the dice are thrown off the table, or at random times during the day,
the boxman inspects the dice to ensure they arent damaged and to ensure they have the
correct code for that day. This helps protect the casino from cheats who insert capped
dice (crooked dice) into the game. Depending on the casino, a pair of dice will remain in
play for eight to 24 hours.
The Dice Dish
A small glass, plastic, or wooden dish is placed on the table directly in front of the
stickman against the side of the table. Unused dice are kept in this dish. Although only
two dice are used during a game, the stickman maintains between four and eight dice in
his dish (usually five or six).
At the beginning of a new game, the stickman dumps the dice from the dish onto
the table and then uses his mop (i.e., stick) to push them all to the next shooter. The
shooter selects two dice she wants to throw, and the stickman pulls the unused dice back
and places them in the dish.
The Placard
A removable placard is mounted on the inside wall of the table on the dealers
side. This sign defines the tables minimum bet, maximum bet, and maximum Odds
allowed. The signs are also color-coded so you can easily know the table minimum from
a distance. Typically, white indicates a $2 or $3 minimum, red is $5 minimum, yellow or
blue is $10 minimum, and green is $25 minimum.
The minimum and maximum bet amounts usually apply to all bets except
proposition bets. The typical table has a $5 or $10 minimum bet, $2000 maximum bet,
and allows three, four, or five times Odds depending on the point number. The minimum
proposition bet is usually the value of the lowest-denomination chip used at the table. For
example, if $1 chips are being used, then $1 is the minimum for a proposition bet.
Chapter 4: Table Layout 17
Chapter 4
Table Layout
The table is covered in felt, like a pool table, with a printed diagram of the various
types of possible bets. The table layout is divided into three areas: two side sections and a
center section. The two side sections are exactly alike and each side section has its own
dealer. The center section is a shared area for players at both ends of the table. The
stickman works the center section. The blank buffer area between the end of the table and
the printed diagram (i.e., the layout) is called the apron. See Figure 4-1 and Figure
4-2 for illustrations of the table layout.
Typically, the felt is green and the diagram is printed in plain block letters.
However, newer tables are being custom-built to a casinos specifications. Dont be
surprised to find tables with bright colors and unique print, such as Roman numerals
instead of plain numbers.
When taking a position at the table, the only areas you care about are the center
section and the side section at which you stand. The other side section at the other end of
the table doesnt matter to you because its only for the players at that end of the table.
Each side section has two areas: the self-service (or players) area and the dealers area.
The self-service area of the layout includes the following bets: Pass Line, Dont
Pass Line, Come, Dont Come, Field, and on some tables the Big 6 and Big 8. This
players area is called the self-service area because you make and pick up these bets
yourself without the dealer getting involved.
The dealers area includes the six square boxes with the numbers 4 through 10,
excluding 7. These numbered boxes are known as point boxes and the dealer puts
several types of your bets here: Place, Buy, Lay, Come, and Dont Come bets. The thin
rectangles at the top and bottom of each point box are where the dealer puts Place bets.
The wider rectangles at the top of each point box are where the dealer puts Lay and Dont
Come bets. The dealer puts Buy and Come inside the square point boxes. Unlike the self-
service area, youre not allowed to put down or pick up any bets in the dealers area.
Later, well discuss how you make these bets with the dealers help.
The center section is shared by both sides of the table and has the proposition bets.
The stickman handles all bets in the center section; therefore, as with the dealers area,
dont put down or pick up any bets in this section.
Boxman Dealer Apron
Dont
Come
ne
Dont Pass Bar

x Bar
4 5 Si 8 Ni 10
PASS LINE
See
separate
figure to
view the
Center
Come
Players
Section.
Pays Double Pays Double
3 4 9 10 11
2 12
FIELD B
I 8
Dont Pass Bar
6G
PASS LINE
Stickman
Apron Players
Figure 4-1. Craps Table Layout, Side Section
HARDWAYS
E E
C C
E 9 to 1 9 to 1 E
C C
E C C E
Side Section
Side Section
7 to 1 7 to 1
E C C E
ONE ROLL BETS
E C 4 to 1 ANY SEVEN 4 to 1 C E
E C C E
30 to 1 30 to 1
C HORN C
E E
C 15 to 1 15 to 1 C
E 7 to 1
E
ANY CRAPS 7 to 1
Figure 4-2. Craps Table Layout, Center Section
Chapter 5: Approach the Table 20
Chapter 5
Approach the Table
Youre in the casino, lights are flashing, electronic machines are chiming, you
have a pocketful of money, and your heart races as the excitement builds. You see the
craps tables in the distance. Your pace quickens. The three people at one table are quiet;
not much action. The 15 people at the other table are cheering, laughing, clapping,
high-fiving, and hugging each other. You think, Wow, that table must be hot.
Theres one open spot at the end by the fat guy. You think, I dont know if I can
squeeze into that spot. Ill wait for another one. Before you finish your thought,
someone dashes into that last open position, squeezing in sideways between the fat guy
and the drunk with a cigarette hanging off his lip. You think, Oh, man, that guy took my
spot. Thats okay, Ill get the next one.
You stand in the background, jockeying for position to see the action. You count
the number of players on each side of the table, confirming that no more players can
squeeze in. The shooter is on fire. She rolls number after number. A drunk yells,
Winner, winner, chicken dinner! The gorgeous woman on the other side of the drunk is
thrilled and hugging everyone at that end of the table. The players chip racks are filling
up with red, green, and black chips. You wait. You watch. No one leaves. You continue
watching. Everyone wins tons of money. Except you.
What just happened here? Fear. Youre new to the game; youre not sure of what
to do; you let fear take control. Not enough room by the fat guy was just an excuse for not
taking the only open position at a hot table. The result--you lost out on winning gobs of
money.
Get Over Your Fear
Its natural, it happens to everyone. If youve never played craps, youll probably
be scared crapless (pun intended) of walking up to the table, plopping down your money,
and making that first bet. It feels worse if you have to do it alone without someone to
guide you or give you confidence.
I remember the first time I played. It was at the old Vegas World before it became
the Stratosphere. My lovely wife was off in a corner feeding a nickel video poker
machine. I was alone. I strolled in circles around the casino for an hour, looking at the
tables, telling myself, Okay, Im ready now. Then, I walked up to the table and froze. I
pretended to watch, not interested in actually playing. After a few minutes of feeling like
an idiot, I turned around and walked in circles again. Finally, I got the nerve to take an
open position at the table. I was so nervous that I dropped my wallet onto the table. One
of the crew made an amusing remark, which embarrassed me more. I forgot I wasnt
supposed to hand the dealer my fresh hundred-dollar bill, so when the dealer told me to
drop it on the table, I realized my mistake, which added to my anxiety. After the shooter
threw a seven-out, I knew the current game was over and time to start a new game. I took
a deep breath, made my first $5 Pass Line bet, and the rest is history.
Accept it. Youll be nervous the first time. But dont let it keep you from playing.
After about 10 minutes, your fear will be gone and youll laugh and holler with everyone
else. Just take a deep breath and walk up to the table.
Take an Open Spot
You see a table with several open positions. Which spot should you take? Thats
a matter of personal preference. Is there a gorgeous man or woman playing alone at one
end of the table? Which players are smoking? Which look bored? Which appear drunk
or obnoxious? Pick a spot where youll feel the most comfortable.
I like playing on the end, immediately next to the dealer (position #8). (See
Figure 5-1 for player positions.) On the end, I dont have to worry about players on both
sides of me. I dont like playing next to the stickman because I always seem to be in the
way of him reaching for the dice or maneuvering the stick. One time, the guy accidentally
bopped me on my head with his stick. Of course, he was very apologetic, but that didnt
make my head feel any better.
After playing for a while, youll get a feel for your favorite position. You dont
have a choice when its crowded. If you get a lousy spot (e.g., an obnoxious guy is next to
you), simply move to another open spot. If the table is full, wait until someone leaves and
take their position. Be aware of a player coloring up, which is a sign that shes leaving,
and tell the dealer that you want to move into her position. The dealer will then hold that
spot and not allow a new player to quickly step in. The dealer will politely ask the new
player to move to the spot that you vacate. Obviously, when you change positions, dont
forget to take your chips.
People next to you can affect your mood and entire playing experience. They can
make it fun or miserable. You might get stuck next to a chain-smoking fat guy with
wicked body odor, or it might be a group of heavily drinking babes spilling out of their
halter tops. So, choose wisely, Grasshopper.
Recently, my brother and I were in Vegas and we went to our favorite casino for
craps. (Our wives let us go alone together on condition that they could go shopping at the
Mall of America in Bloomington, Minnesota.) The casino has a sit-down table, a
$3 minimum, and 100 times Odds (a craps players dream come true, which well discuss
later). We arrived at about 9:00am, hoping for an empty seat at the sit-down table. No
luck. Just as we asked each other if we wanted to go somewhere else, two guys put their
chips down to color up. (Coloring up is when a player exchanges small-denomination
chips for larger ones, usually when he wants to leave the table.) My brother and I took
their seats, bought some chips, and made our $3 Pass Line bets.
Two young ladies, about 30, sat to the left of us. Three of their friends stood
directly behind them watching. From their deep Southern drawl, I figured they were from
L.A. (Lower Alabama). It was only 9:00am, but they each held some kind of liquor drink.
My brother said, You girls are starting kind of early this morning.
Honey, weve been drinking all night long, the noisiest one said. (I could barely
understand her slurred accent.)
Neither of them had a clue how to play the game. They made the minimum $1 and
$3 bets and were simply having fun. They relied on the dealer to tell them what to do,
how much to bet, where to put their chips, and when to pick up their winnings. The dealer
was wonderful--funny, helpful, friendly, and patient.
The noisy one did most of the talking--and laughing. That laugh, Ill never forget
it. It was a low, bellowing, Bwaahahaha! Each time she won a red $5 chip, she
laughed, Thats going in the vault. Bwaahahaha! Then, she stuffed it into her bra, took
another sip of liquor, and asked the dealer, How much do I bet now?
After a couple of rolls, two guys at the end of the table screamed, Yes! One of
them won about $50 on a big bet, and the other won only $5. The $5 winner shouted,
Were rolling now!
The noisy girl broke out into another Bwaahahaha, after half choking on her
drink. She looked at the $5 winner and said, What are you jumping up and down all
excited for? You didnt win anything! She then pulled a $5 chip from her bra, held it up,
and turned to her friends, He won five dollars and hes jumping like a fool.
Bwaahahaha! He got money. Bwaahahaha!
Everyone at the table cracked up, including the dealer. Even the guy she made fun
of laughed. Just the way she said money in that drunken, deep accent was hysterical,
muh-nee.
Thats cigarette money. Bwaahahaha! He got money!
I was literally in tears.
What do I bet now? she asked the dealer while sipping her drink.
How about another horny bet? he said. (The dealer referred to a Horn bet,
having fun with her by calling it a horny bet.)
Yeah, baby, I like those horny bets, she said. Bwaahahaha! He got money!
I hadnt laughed that hard in quite a while.
So, the moral of this story is, people at the table can make or break your playing
experience. Again, choose your spots wisely. Bwaahahaha! He got money!
Position #8
Dont
Come
Player
ne
Dont Pass Bar

x Bar
4 5 Si 8 Ni 10
PASS LINE
Position #7
Player
Come
3 4 9 10 11
2 12
Position #6
FIELD B
I 8
Player
Dont Pass Bar
6G
PASS LINE
er n #5
ay io
Player Player Player Player Pl osit
Position #1 Position #2 Position #3 Position #4 P
Figure 5-1. Player Positions
Drop Your Buy-in Money and Get Your Chips

Before you approach the table, have your buy-in money ready in your pocket.
You dont want to fiddle with your wallet at the table, showing other players how thick it
is with hundred-dollar bills.
When taking a position at the table, a game will likely be in progress. You can
buy-in at any time; you dont have to wait for the current game to end. However, dont
drop your money if the shooter is getting ready to throw. Wait until the shooter throws,
then wait until the dealer finishes paying off all bets for that roll. While the stickman still
holds the dice in the center of the table (before he pushes them to the shooter for another
roll), ensure you have the dealers attention and drop your buy-in money in front of you in
the Come area. As you drop your money, say in a strong voice so the dealer and boxman
can hear you, Change only, please.
Change only, please, makes it clear to the crew that youre not making any bets
with your cash; you simply want to exchange it for chips. The dealer responds so the
boxman can hear, Cheque change only, then picks up your cash and places it in front of
the boxman. The boxman counts it to verify the amount and turns it facedown so the
camera can get a good look at the denominations before pushing it down the money slot.
When the boxman gives the okay, the dealer places a stack of chips in front of you. Pick
up your chips immediately, unless the shooter is getting ready to throw. Never reach
down into the table when the shooter is about to throw. Its considered bad luck if a die
hits your hand. If a 7 shows after hitting your hand, the whole table gets mad and blames
you for causing a 7-out.
Put your chips in the chip rack directly in front of you. If the dealer gives you
chips in different denominations, immediately arrange them in your rack so the higher-
denomination chips are in the center (i.e., surrounded on both sides by the
lower-denomination chips). This protects your higher-denomination chips from theft. For
example, suppose your buy-in is $200. The dealer typically gives you four green chips
($25 each), 18 red chips ($5 each), and 10 white chips ($1 each). Make sure you protect
those green chips by putting them between the red or white ones.
This seems trivial, but theres a good reason for it. Most people with whom you
gamble are fairly honest, but the moment you let your guard down is probably when
youll get hit. Look at the boxmans huge chip stack. Notice that the $1 chips are on the
outside ends of the stack, then the $5 chips, then the $25 chips, and so on. The highest-
denomination chips are in the center. When in the center and protected, the chips are less
vulnerable to theft. Same goes for your chips.
A thief typically sneaks one of your chips when youre leaning over the table. For
example, as you lean over to roll the dice, the natural tendency is to remain leaning until
the dice have stopped. Everyones attention, even the crews, is typically on the dice at
the opposite end of the table. This is the optimal time for the thief to reach for your stack
and sneak a chip. Its too difficult for a thief to sneak one from the center of your stack,
so he usually goes for one on the end. If a thief sees your $1 or $5 chips on the outside of
your chip stack, hell likely find another player with unprotected high-denomination chips,
rather than risk being caught for a measly $1 or $5.
Another simple way to avoid being a victim is to keep one hand on your chips at
all times. Im right-handed, so I always keep my left hand on the left edge of my chip
stack. When I roll the dice, take a drink, or turn my head to cough, I use my right hand
and keep my left hand on my chips. This discourages thieves from picking me as a target.
Heres another tip to lessen your chance of being a victim. Keep your wallet in
your back pocket only if the pocket can be secured with a button. If you wear jeans, put
your wallet in the front pocket. You occasionally lean on the tables elbow pad with your
rear end sticking out into the aisle. The outline of your wallet bulging through your
unbuttoned back pocket is a tempting target for a thief. For women, if you must carry a
purse, then I recommend never putting it on the tables bottom shelf.
Chapter 6: Roll the Dice 26
Chapter 6
Roll the Dice
After each throw, the stickman gathers the dice and places them in the center of
the table while waiting for the dealers to catch up. If its crowded with a lot of bets on the
table, the stickman waits until the dealers pay all winning bets. When the dealers are
ready, the stickman pushes the dice to you. Regardless of what else is occurring at the
table (e.g., a conversation between a player and the boxman, the dealer re-stacking chips
or otherwise appears hes not paying attention, etc.), when the stickman pushes the dice to
you, its a silent indication for you to pick them up and throw them.
When selecting two dice to throw, simply reach down and take two. Dont
analyze each die or rearrange them or take forever to pick two. Just take any two so the
game can start. Its annoying when a new shooter picks up all six dice, drops them all on
the table, scoops them all up again, drops them all again, trying to find a pair that he
thinks is lucky. Avoid doing this. Its inconsiderate and just plain silly because there are
no lucky dice. Other players are anxious for the game to start, and no one wants to wait
for some clown wasting time trying to figure out which two dice are going to land his
way. Just pick two and start the game.
When handling the dice, always use one hand and never allow the dice to leave the
table. Leaving the table means bringing them outside the imaginary plane that extends
straight up around the edge of the table. In other words, when holding the dice, always
keep your hand inside the table. This is a standard rule among all casinos for security
purposes. Its difficult to introduce crooked dice into the game using only one hand when
its in plain view over the table. When handling the dice for the first time, you may be
nervous or so excited that you forget these basic rules. The crew will quickly remind you
by politely, but firmly, requesting that you use only one hand and keep it in plain view.
To make the crews job a bit easier, I like to flash an empty hand just before
picking up the dice. As I reach down for the dice, I quickly turn my palm up, flash open
my fingers so they (and the camera) can see my hand is empty, and then grab the dice.
Its an instantaneous, fluid motion just long enough for the crew to see my empty hand,
but quick enough that most players dont notice it and dont realize what Im doing.
Smoothly toss the dice, both at the same time, to the other side of the table so they
hit the table felt first and then bounce against the back wall, which ensures you have no
control over the outcome. If the dice come close to the back wall but dont hit it, the
stickman will likely call it a good roll, but will politely ask you to hit the back wall on
subsequent throws. Follow these simple rules and youll do just fine:
Handle the dice with only one hand.

Dont bring the dice outside the table.
Smoothly toss the dice. Dont slide, drop, or throw them hard.
Dont toss the dice higher than the height of the dealers.
Toss the dice so they land on the table felt and bounce against the back wall.
Sometimes, even with a nice, smooth roll, a die bounces off the table. Thats
okay, it happens. The stickman calls, No roll, empties his dish, and pushes all the dice
to the shooter to select another pair. When a die leaves the table, the shooter has the
option of requesting, Same die, meaning she wants to continue using the one that flew
off the table. This is pure superstition, especially when the shooter is having a hot roll.
Changing a die or both dice in the middle of a hot roll is considered bad luck.
When a die leaves the table, typically a player or member of the pit crew (not the
table crew) picks it up and drops it on the table. The dealers are never allowed to leave
the table to search for a die; they must always keep their eyes on the table. After finding
the die, a player isnt allowed to hand it directly to a dealer. Dealers and players arent
allowed to exchange anything hand-to-hand, whether its money, chips, dice, food, or
anything. Instead, the player drops the die on the table, and the dealer picks it up and
hands it to the boxman. The boxman then inspects it to ensure it has the proper markings
and sometimes spins it between his thumb and index finger to get a feel for the weight (to
verify its not weighted on one side). If it passes inspection, as it usually does, the
boxman drops it on the table and the stickman pushes it to the shooter to use on her next
roll.
Another no roll situation occurs when a die comes to rest on the boxmans chip
stack. When this occurs, the stickman simply gathers the two dice and pushes them back
to the shooter for another throw.
Sometimes, a die lands on the rail (i.e., the players chip rack around the edge of
the table). When this occurs, the stickman usually says something amusing like, No roll,
too tall to call. (A good stickman has lots of rhymes that add to the fun.)
Other situations frequently occur that one might think are no rolls, but are valid.
These situations are when a die comes to rest leaning against the wall, leaning on a
players chip on the table, or leaning against the boxmans chip stack. A leaner is a
valid throw and the outcome for that die is determined to be the number that is most
facing up.
The basic Donts for throwing dice are summarized in the following.
Oftentimes, a bad throw may be considered valid, but its still a bad throw and should
be avoided because of its negative consequences as described below.
--DONT throw them so hard that they hit the back wall first before hitting the
table felt. Instead, toss them smoothly so they first hit the table felt and then bounce off
the back wall and stay inside the table.
--DONT throw them so hard that they bounce repeatedly off the table, throw after
throw. This holds up the game and frustrates everyone. Sometimes a flying die hits
another player and can hurt. (DO say youre sorry if your hard throw causes a die to
bounce off the table and hit someone, especially if it hits them in the head. Be polite.
You never know if the person is a drunk or the type of person who holds a grudge.)
--DONT try to be fancy with your throw. No one cares about your superstitions
or talent for twisting your arm or wrist in weird positions as you launch the dice on their
way. Besides, you look ridiculous.
--DONT waste everyones time arranging the dice in a specific orientation before
picking them up (e.g., some morons like to find the 6 on each die and line them up
parallel, and then recite silly incantations to give them a little extra luck). Its okay if you
want to apply luck or superstition as you play, as long as it doesnt affect other players.
By taking forever to line up your dice in your lucky orientation and applying some sort of
mojo to them, you delay the game, which frustrates the other players. So, dont do it.
--DONT try to appear as though youre skilled at controlling your throw (i.e.,
appearing as if you can somehow control their outcome). If a throw is deemed valid,
theres no way anyone can control the dice to consistently produce a desired outcome. I
dont care what you read in any book or anywhere online about some scammers claim to
have practiced 40 years to learn to throw dice and affect their outcome. Its pure
nonsense. The shooter may be able to control the dice for the instant theyre flying
through the air, but as soon as the dice hit the table felt and bounce off the back wall, the
outcome is completely random. To ensure a random outcome, the dice are required to hit
the back wall, which have all those rubber spikes (pyramids) that cause the dice to bounce
completely randomly. So, to avoid looking silly, dont try to control your throw. Just toss
them to the other end of the table.
--DONT aim for big stacks of chips at the other end of the table. When the other
end has high rollers who have lots of chips stacked on the table, dont try to knock over
the stacks. Chips fly everywhere making a mess and upset the crew because they have to
remember where all those chips go. If you see chip stacks at the other end of the table, do
the dealers a favor and try to aim away from them. If you accidentally hit the chips and
scatter them to the winds, dont worry, they wont say anything the first couple of times.
But if your throws routinely knock chips everywhere, theyll politely ask you to miss
them.
--DONT hit the mirror on the side of the table. The dice are hard and the corners
are generally pointed, not rounded. Dont break the casinos mirror.
--DONT take too long blowing on the dice for luck. A quick puff is okay as long
as it doesnt delay your throw. Remember, your superstitions are okay as long as they
dont affect other players. Unnecessarily delaying the game affects other players.
After a game ends with a 7-out, the stickman passes the dice clockwise to the next
player. If the game ends with a natural or by rolling the point number, the same shooter
continues rolling for the next game. If the shooter is hot and hitting point after point, she
may hold the dice for 30 minutes or more.
If you dont want to shoot, you dont have to. You may choose to pass the dice to
the next clockwise player. If youre too nervous or otherwise not ready to shoot, simply
make a waving motion with your hand toward the next player and tell the stickman,
Pass. The stickman then pushes the dice to the next player.
If you decide to shoot, you must first make a Flat Pass Line or Flat Dont Pass bet
(these bets are discussed in a later chapter). This helps ensure the shooter wont leave the
table before a decision is made to end the game. You can certainly leave the table if you
absolutely must (e.g., youll miss your flight if you dont leave immediately). However, if
you shoot, try to have the courtesy to finish the game before leaving.
Crooked Dice
Chances are slim that youll ever play in a game with crooked dice at a modern
casino. However, every now and then, some idiot tries to cheat the system by inserting
crooked dice into the game. By adhering to strict policies for controlling the game,
casinos eventually catch even the most skilled slight-of-hand artists.
As we know, each player must handle the dice with only one hand and must not
bring the dice outside the table. These two simple rules make the cheats job extremely
tough. To make it more difficult, the table has a mirror along the entire length of the wall
opposite the boxman so the boxman can easily see if the shooter is palming dice.
Additionally, each time a die leaves the table after a roll, the die doesnt come back into
play until after the boxman thoroughly inspects it. The dice are replaced at random times
during the day and typically dont remain in play for more than 24 hours.
Crooked dice come in many forms, such as loaded, painted, capped, tripped,
bricks, and floaters. Loaded dice are heavier on one side. Painted dice have a solution
applied to one side to make it stickier. Capped dice are shaved on one or more sides and
the removed material is replaced by a material with different bounce characteristics.
Tripped dice have their edges altered so theyre not all equal. Bricks (a.k.a. flats) have
one side shaved to reduce the surface area of the adjoining sides. Floaters (because they
float in water) have an off-center hole inside them. Shapes are dice that arent perfect
cubes (some or all sides are either concave or convex).
The intent of crooked dice, regardless of their form, is to alter the likelihood of
certain numbers appearing. Even a slight change in the odds of a certain number
appearing may be enough to change a small house advantage into a small player
advantage. Passers are crooked dice modified to favor point numbers, while missouts
are modified to favor the number 7.
Because of the control measures that modern casinos employ, dont worry about
playing in a legitimate game with crooked dice. Now that you know about crooked dice,
youll understand why the casino has rules for handling the dice and why the casino
interrupts play to inspect every die that leaves the table.
Chapter 7: Dice Setting 31
Chapter 7
Dice Setting
We talked briefly in the last chapter about dice setting and its absurdity. Lets
revisit the subject so you dont get duped into wasting your money. Simply put, dice
setting is controlling the dice to increase the appearance of certain numbers and decrease
the appearance of others; thereby, decreasing the house advantage.
The Internet truly is a wonderful creation, but be careful. Ive noticed an
abundance of websites advertising seminars and formal classes for learning dice setting to
control the outcome of a craps decision. Some claim you can learn to consistently roll
certain numbers. Other smarter hoodwinkers who realize the silliness of such a claim
assert that, although you cant reliably role specific numbers, you can affect the outcome
enough to change a small house advantage into a small player advantage. Even respected
gaming authors have written and sold entire books on the subject. Do yourself a big
favor--dont fall for these ridiculous claims.
Craps can be beaten! Dice control specialists. Release and throw the dice on
their axis and hit their sweet spots every time. Who makes up this mumbo-jumbo?
Better yet, who believes it? Apparently, people do; otherwise, these websites wouldnt
exist and books wouldnt sell. They claim that dice control is a physical skill you can
learn. That is, you can learn it after paying hundreds of dollars. They entice you with
carefully chosen words and pictures explaining how to master stance, spin control, set,
grab, grip, delivery, and bounce control to increase or decrease your likelihood of rolling a
number. Lets look at these silly claims a bit closer.
Craps can be beaten! Of course, it can be beaten. Any idiot using any bizarre
system can win. The question is will the system win, and will it win consistently? If I
win only one session out of 100, then I can deceitfully say that I beat the game in terms of
that one session. But will I have more or less money in my pocket over the long-term?
Most definitely less. No combination of bet types and bet amounts will consistently win
over the long-term. (We discuss so-called winning systems in a later chapter.)
Additionally, as explained below, I believe that no wacky dice-setting technique will
consistently win over time.
Dice control specialists. Be skeptical of such claims. What criteria are used to
measure their skill and what level of skill warrants the title specialist? Some websites
even say their dice-setting instructors are certified. Again, be skeptical. Whats the
certification authority (i.e., whats the certifying organization and what are its
credentials)? Unless the criteria and certification authority for becoming a dice-control
specialist are defined and legitimate, dont fall for the certified specialist nonsense thats
advertised on some websites. If the certification criteria are defined on the website, then
read them carefully. For example, consider the notional criterion, Each of our
dice-setting specialists has more than 30 years of experience in rolling dice. That
criterion is meaningless. A trained drunk monkey can toss dice for 30 years (assuming a
monkey can live that long), so it, too, can have 30 years of experience in rolling dice.
Release and throw the dice on their axis and hit their sweet spots every time. (A
sweet spot is typically the spot on a bat, club, or racket where the vibration from the
impact of a ball is canceled out, so the hitter doesn't feel any stinging or shaking. So,
what is the sweet spot on a die, anyway?) For dice, what does hitting their sweet spots
do? Does it eliminate vibration within the dice, thereby, helping to result in a consistent
bounce? Theoretically, I guess its possible, but so is time travel (i.e., Einsteins theory of
relativity). It may be possible, but in my opinion, its highly unlikely. Craps dice, with
their sharp angles and points, must travel at the exact same speed and distance, follow the
exact same trajectory, and land at the exact same angle to have a consistent bounce off the
tabletop. If everything isnt exactly the same, the resulting bounce is random, not
controlled. You must also account for humidity, temperature, air flow, and even the
precise location of where the dice contact the tabletop (the tabletop likely has subtle
differences in bounce characterictics because of the tightness of the felt, varying density
of the tabletop material, and other factors). A slight difference in an environmental
condition can have a slight affect on the orientation of the dice as they fly through the air.
And the slightest deviation from the desired flight path or orientation will cause a slight
change in the angle at which the dice hit the tabletop, resulting in a random bounce. Even
if you successfully control their bounce off the tabletop, you must then control their
bounce off the back wall. The dice must consistently contact the rubber spikes (pyramids)
on the back wall at precisely the same angles and speeds to consistently get the desired
results. Varying environmental conditions may also affect the bounce characteristics of
the rubber at different times during the day, thereby, causing a random bounce. Because
all variables must be in such precise alignment with the heavens and stars, I believe that
deviation and error cannot be removed. In my opinion, I truly believe that quantum
physicists will prove Einsteins theory of relativity and actually demonstrate time travel
before anyone develops a dice-tossing skill that can consistently control the bounce off
both the tabletop and the back wall.
For a mere $500, so-called certified instructors will teach you the crossed-sixes
set, the 2-V set, the all-sevens set, the ice-tong grip, the stacked grip, the 2-finger front
diagonal grip, and many other sets, grips, and tosses to reliably influence a craps decision.
For example, if you use the all-sevens set with the proper grip pressure, bounce control,
toss angle, spin control, and stance, you can reliably roll a 7.
They might as well take their bizarre claims a step further and advertise that their
Master Yodas can teach us to use the Force, too. Come on, get real. Do they really expect
us to believe that the way we position our feet and the amount of pressure on each foot
can affect our spin and bounce control; thereby, affecting the outcome of our roll? Good
grief. The one I like, in particular, is the 6-5 set. They claim this set is good for the
come-out roll only; not good for Place numbers. Sadly, people do, indeed, believe this
nonsense.
Not only do they sell dice-tossing lessons, some sell practice boxes, too. Imagine
that! $500 for a days seminar and theyll throw in a practice box for the incredibly low
price of only $199. Woohoo! Wheres my checkbook?
Another website suggests warming up with your practice box or in your hotel
rooms dresser drawer before going down to the tables to get a feel for how your toss is at
that particular time of day. A dresser drawer? Good grief. Even the dumbest moron
should quickly realize how silly that sounds. A dresser drawer doesnt have the same
rebound characteristics and friction coefficient as a craps table, and doesnt have little
rubber spikes on the back wall against which the dice must bounce. So, how could
practicing in a three-foot-wide dresser drawer without rubber spikes foretell anything
about your potential results at a twelve-foot craps table?
It may be possible to minimally control the flight of the dice before they hit the
table, but I just dont believe anyone can control their multiple bounces, especially off the
back wall thats lined with hundreds of little rubber spikes, each of which is carefully
designed to produce a random bounce. See Figure 7-1 and Figure 7-2 for illustrations of
the pyramid rubber that lines the back wall. Remember, we learned in an earlier chapter
that the casino has strict rules for tossing the dice, which include a requirement that they
hit the back wall (thereby, hitting the pyramid rubber). Do you honestly believe that
anyone can consistently control the precise angles and speed at which the dice contact
those rubber spikes? Additionally, to compound the problem, the layout is often sprinkled
with chips in the Pass Line, apron, Dont Pass line, Come box, point boxes, and Field box.
The dice sometimes hit one or more chips either before or after bouncing off the back
wall. Its unlikely that anyone can control the angle at which the dice contact the chip
and, therefore, the deflection off that chip.
The books and websites claim that casinos hate skilled dice shooters because of
their potential for changing a small house advantage into a small player advantage. Yes,
casinos hate dice setters, but not for that reason. Casinos hate them because they delay the
game, which means fewer rolls per hour, which means fewer dollars for the casino (the
lower the roll rate (rolls per hour), the lower the casinos profit). Dice setters seemingly
take forever to shoot. They slowly rotate each die until the perfect combination appears,
then carefully align them, then slowly take what they believe is a precise grip with the
precise amount of pressure, then apply the perfect amount of mojo to the dice by waving
their free hand over them or blowing on them or doing some other nonsense, and then
finally toss them using some sort of weird gyration designed to impress everyone at the
table with their dice-tossing skill. Instead of taking two or three seconds to simply pick up
the dice and toss them, these clowns take what feels like forever. The casinos dont like
them, I dont like them, and neither will you.
Back Wall Lined with Rubber

(see next figure for close-up)
Smooth-faced Rubber Pyramids (Spikes)
Padded Arm Rest Chip Rack Padded Arm Rest
Chip Rack
Stickman
Pass Line
ine
assL
P
Dealer
Mirror
Tabletop Layout: Side Section Tabletop Layout: Center Section
Figure 7-1. Pyramid Rubber on the Back Wall of the Table
Smooth face
extends up
about 5 inches
Each pyramid is
about 3/4-inch
square at its base
Typically 7 rows of
pyramids.
Total width (top to

bottom) of rubber
is about 11 inches.
Pyramid rubber
extends around the
entire back wall.
Bottom edge
adjoins the
tabletop
Figure 7-2. Close-up of the Pointy Rubber Pyramids on the Back Wall
(Straight-on Frontal View)
Remember, in a modern casino, a roll is deemed valid only when the dice hit the
back wall and, therefore, the pointy rubber spikes. The design characteristics of
the spikes (e.g., size, shape, angles, material, density, quantity, pattern, etc.)
guarantee the casino a random bounce.
You want proof that dice control is a scam to rip you off? Consider one simple
question and its answer. Take a deep breath and try to relax your overwhelming desire to
get rich off the casino. Now, ask yourself, Do you think that the casino would allow
truly skilled dice setters to play with an advantage over the house, no matter how slight?
Be honest with your answer.
Again, Do you think that the casino would allow truly skilled dice setters to play
with an advantage over the house, no matter how slight? Of course not. The casino has
the right to deny service to any player for any reason, whether youre too drunk, too
obnoxious, too lucky, too skilled, or too anything. If they dont want you playing for any
reason, they can tell you to leave and theres nothing you, the law, or anyone can do about
it. Consider blackjack card counters. Card counting is entirely legal, but if the casino
thinks a player is card counting (and, thus, has a small advantage over the house), it
immediately removes him from the game. The casino never accepts a player advantage.
The casino always has the advantage--always. Same with craps. If the casino believes a
player has an advantage over the house by means of controlling the dice, it removes him
from the game. The bottom line is that when the dice hit the back wall, no one knows
how theyll bounce off those rubber pyramids. Thats why casinos allow dice setters to
use their wacky tossing routines.
Again, Do you think that the casino would allow truly skilled dice setters to play
with an advantage over the house, no matter how slight? Ive never heard of any of the
so-called dice doctors, dice wizards, or famous multi-book dice-control authors getting
thrown out of a casino because of their dice-tossing skills. Have you? According to their
websites and written works, they routinely play in casinos across the globe allegedly
beating the heck out of the casino. So, ask yourself again, Do you think that the casino
would allow truly skilled dice setters to play with an advantage over the house, no matter
how slight?
Casinos have been around for a long time. Theyre big business. Consider the
multi-billion dollar resorts in Vegas (yes, that's billion with a b). Do you honestly
think they havent thoroughly examined the legitimacy of dice control? A player
advantage smacks those mega-businesses right where it hurts--in their wallets. Do you
honestly think the casinos would tolerate and allow a player to play with an advantage
over the house? The answer is obvious to me. Is it obvious to you? Put yourself in the
casinos shoes. If you have the right to deny service to anyone for any reason, why would
you allow anyone to play with an advantage over you and, thereby, risk losing your
wallet? I doubt that you would.
If you agree that casinos do allow dice-control specialists to play, and if you agree
that casinos dont allow players to play with an advantage over the casino, then what does
that tell you about all the books, articles, websites, newsletters, and magazines that claim
you can beat the heck out of the casino by using dice control? I dont see how the answer
could be any more obvious or simple. Lets do an easy analysis: Casinos allow dice
setters to play; casinos dont allow a player to play with an advantage over the house;
therefore, it stands to reason that the casino doesnt believe the dice setter can gain an
advantage over the house. Its that simple. You wanted proof that dice control is a scam?
That sounds like awfully convincing proof to me, how about you? If its true that the
casino doesnt believe the dice setter can gain an advantage over the house, then why
should you believe it?
If you still dont see the light, its probably because youre desperately clinging to
your blazing desire to beat the heck out of the casino. You want so badly the idea of dice
control to be legitimate that you can taste it. You think, Regardless of what you say, I
saw a guy last night set the dice and he rolled point after point. It worked for him, so how
can you say it doesnt work? Simple. It was his turn to get lucky at that particular
instant in time. Everyone has good times, mediocre times, and bad times. Even the dice
setter gets lucky occasionally. The question is whether the dice setter is consistently a
winner. Hes not. His hot streak turns cold, just as it does for everyone. Minutes after his
hot roll, the dice setter again goes through his wacky motions, but this time he
immediately rolls a losing 7-out. As well learn in a later chapter, its not the players
dice-shooting skill or the players betting system that makes him a winner, its the
distribution variance. The game is designed for the player to lose, so the players only
hope for winning lies with the phenomenon called variance. Nothing more, nothing less.
Remember, the knowledgeable player plays for fun and excitement, not because of some
misguided false hope of winning.
What these dice-setting gurus have done is quite entrepreneurial. They realize
more people are learning that no true winning system exists, so profits from selling them
have dropped. They probably asked themselves, How can we still make money off these
money-hungry get-rich-quick fools? It didnt take them long to figure it out. They
probably thought, If we cant get them to buy our bogus betting systems, our only other
option is to convince them they can control the dice. I must admit, its brilliant. Throw
in some fancy words and statistical terms to make it sound scientific, get some of their
acquaintances to plug it and write a few testimonials, then cleverly advertise it as a way to
beat the casino for untold profits. Woohoo! Wheres my checkbook? Oh, and dont
forget to buy the practice box, too. Youll definitely need that.
I cant help wondering why these so-called experts waste their time giving
seminars and writing books instead of playing craps. If their dice-setting skills can beat
the house out of thousands of dollars each session, why arent they making millions each
year by putting their skills to work? Student testimonials on some of these dice-setting
websites claim winning thousands after just a few hours of playing time using the
techniques learned in the seminars, so why dont the dice wizards and writers make
millions for themselves by applying what they claim? If students can win thousands after
attending a short seminar (as the testimonials state), imagine what the experts can win
using the skills theyve supposedly honed for years.
I suspect that their response might be such nonsense as, I enjoy teaching (or
writing). Its in my blood. I love sharing my knowledge with others, helping them to
obtain wealth to make their lives easier and more satisfying. Im a teacher (or writer), not
a craps shooter. Ive devoted my life to teaching (or writing). (Excuse me while I throw
up.) Gee, that sounds so noble of them. Lets have a group hug and sing Kumbaya. If
they love it so much, why dont they provide their services and books for free? Wouldnt
it then be much more self-rewarding, self-enriching, and self-fulfilling?
Heres an idea for them to consider. Spend each morning playing craps using their
dice-setting skills to make a minimum of $1,000 per day (thats at least $365,000 per
year). Apparently, this is easy to do, according to the testimonials. Then, in the
afternoons and evenings, they could teach their seminars and write their books for free.
This approach would accomplish two goals: 1) Make plenty of money to live well
(probably much more than selling seminars and books), and 2) Achieve harmony with
their inner spirits by doing what they love and feeling good about themselves for helping
the less fortunate. Because of their enormous craps winnings, they wouldnt have to sell
their books or services. This would allow them to reach out to even more unfortunate
people because, if it were free, more people would take their seminars and read their
books. Imagine how many more lives they could improve if it were free. Imagine how
much more heartwarming and rewarding it would be for them if they selflessly gave it
away for nothing. If they could beat the house for millions, they certainly wouldnt need
the relatively minimal income from book and seminar sales. I dont know about you, but
to me, it doesnt add up. These shysters are settling for a fraction of what they supposedly
could make if they simply implemented the schemes theyre peddling to you and me.
Makes you wonder, doesnt it?
When you experience these clowns at the table, act like a beginner and politely
ask, Why do you do set the dice like that? Youll be amazed and amused by their stupid
responses. But dont stand too close while talking to them; their bad breath from all the
bullshit coming out of their mouths is strong enough to knock you down. For even more
fun, ask them, What number are you going to roll? If he responds (he likely wont),
then say, A buck side bet says you wont roll that number. If youre lucky and the idiot
takes your bets, youll win more from him than you will from the casino.
When its your turn to shoot, casually pick up the dice and smoothly toss them
using a natural, fluid motion. If you need to apply some mojo, its okay to gently knock
the table once or twice with the dice or quickly blow on them as part of your tossing
motion. But, please, we all beg you, dont set the dice before each and every throw.
Chapter 8: Basic Play and Types of Bets 39
Chapter 8
Basic Play and Types of Bets
A new game starts with the come-out roll where the stickman typically says,
New shooter, coming out. Once a new game starts, it continues until a decision is
made. The decision that ends the game is whether the shooter makes his point or rolls a
seven-out (7-out).
Prior to the come-out roll, the dealer places the puck in the OFF position (black
side up) on the side of the table, usually near the Dont Come box. The OFF puck
indicates that a new game is about to start. The shooter rolls the dice. If the shooter rolls
a 2, 3, 7, 11, or 12 (either of which is called a natural), a decision is made immediately
and the game ends with that single roll. A 2, 3, or 12 on the come-out roll is called
craps or crapping out. The same shooter then continues and starts a new game. If the
number appearing on the come-out roll is any of the remaining possible numbers (i.e., 4,
5, 6, 8, 9, 10), then a point is established (these numbers are called point numbers). The
dealer places the puck in the ON position (white side up) in the point box corresponding
to the point number that the shooter establishes. So, if you walk up to a table and see an
OFF puck, you know that a new game is about to start. If you see an ON puck in one of
point boxes, a game is already in progress and that number is the point.
If the shooter establishes a point on the come-out roll (i.e., rolls a 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, or
10), the shooter continues rolling until she rolls the point number again or until she rolls a
7, which results in a decision and the game ends. If the shooter ends the game by rolling
the point number, that same shooter keeps the dice and starts a new game. If she rolls a 7
(called a 7-out), she loses the dice and the next shooter in line clockwise around the
table starts the next new game.
Remember, a craps is when the shooter rolls a 2, 3, or 12 on the come-out roll;
and a 7-out is when the shooter establishes a point and then ends the game by rolling
a 7. When a 7-out occurs, dont be one of the many who yell, Oh, man, he crapped out!
This tells everyone, including the dealers and boxman, that you dont know the game as
well as you think. When the dealers learn of your inexperience, they have better luck
influencing your bets. So, when a shooter rolls a 7-out, call it a seven-out, not a
craps.
In terms of a decision that ends the game, once a point is established, the only
relevant numbers are the point number and 7. All other numbers are meaningless in terms
of a decision to end the game. The following scenario illustrates how games end with
decisions.
1. The shooter rolls an 8 on the come-out roll, so the point for this game is 8. The
dealer turns the puck ON (white side up) and places it in the 8 point box.
2. After the point is established, the only numbers that matter, in terms of ending
the game, are the point number and 7. The shooter rolls a 12, which doesnt matter, so the
game continues and the shooter rolls again.
3. The shooter rolls a 4, which doesnt matter, so the game continues and the
shooter rolls again.
4. The shooter rolls an 8 (i.e., she rolls her point number). The game ends. The
dealer turns the puck OFF (black side up) and places it on the side of the table.
5. Since the shooter rolled her point, she continues shooting the next game. The
shooter rolls a 7 on the come-out roll for the new game. A 7 on the come-out is a natural,
so the game ends immediately. The shooter continues shooting the next game.
6. The shooter rolls a 12 on the come-out roll for the new game. A 12 on the
come-out is a natural, so the game ends immediately. The shooter continues shooting the
next game.
7. The shooter rolls a 5 on the come-out roll, so the point for this new game is 5.
The dealer turns the puck ON (white side up) and places it in the 5 point box.
8. The shooter rolls a 10, which doesnt matter, so the game continues and the
shooter rolls again.
9. The shooter rolls a 7 (i.e., a 7-out). The game ends. The dealer turns the puck
OFF (black side up) and places it on the side of the table. Because the shooter rolled a
7-out, the dice move clockwise to the next player at the table who wants to shoot.
If the shooter rolls the point number to end the game, she gets to use the same dice
to start a new game, or she may choose to select another pair from the stickmans dish.
However, if the shooter makes her point, those dice are usually considered lucky so youll
seldom see a shooter asking for a new pair.
If the shooter rolls a 7-out to end the game, the stickman empties all the dice from
his dish and uses his stick to push them all to the next shooter. The new shooter selects
two, and the stickman pulls the remaining dice back and places them in his dish. A new
game, with a new come-out roll, is about to start.
Types of Bets
Craps offers a variety of bets, some good and some bad. Ill explain later what
good and bad mean, but first lets learn the basics. Most bets are similarly marked on
the tables of all casinos, so in general, all craps tables look alike, except for cosmetic
differences such as color and letter/number style. Some casinos offer a few additional
unique bets, such as Hop bets, Big 6 and 8, and no craps. These bets are always marked
on the table so youll easily know if the casino offers them.
Flat Bets
The most basic craps bets are the Pass Line and Dont Pass. These bets are
common in that each is a Flat bet, which means the bet is typically made before a new
game starts and before a point is established. Also, the Pass Line and Dont Pass bets can
have an Odds bet, which is an additional bet on or against the point number after the point
is established. Other Flat bets are the Come and Dont Come, which are made after a
point is established. All these bets are defined later, but the point here is simply to define
Flat bet so youll know the term when you hear it.
Pass Line Bet
A Pass Line bet is a Flat bet that you typically make prior to a come-out roll. If
you walk up to the table and see an OFF puck, you know a new game is about to start and
you can get in on the action by making a Pass Line bet. The Pass Line is the long, curved
section along the edge of the layout closest to where the players stand. Its clearly labeled
as, PASS LINE, typically in white letters. The Pass Line is sometimes called the front
line. (Youll occasionally hear the stickmans banter, Winner, winner, front line
winner.) The Pass Line on the layout goes around the entire edge of the table where the
players stand so any player in any position can easily reach it.
The table minimum and maximum bets are defined by the placards on the inside of
the table next to each dealer. For example, if you see a red placard defining a $5
minimum and a $2,000 maximum, that means your Pass Line bet must be at least $5, but
cant be more than $2,000.
The Flat Pass Line bet is a self-service bet, which means you make this bet
yourself by placing your chip(s) on the Pass Line. Generally, the only time the dealer
makes a Pass Line bet for you (i.e., the dealer puts the chip(s) on the Pass Line) is when
you ask for change and tell the dealer to put some of it on the Pass Line. For example,
suppose you want to make a $5 Pass Line bet but all you have are green $25 chips. After
you have the dealers attention, drop a green chip in the Come area and say, Five on the
line, please. The dealer knows exactly what you want. He changes the $25 chip for five
$5 chips and makes the Pass Line bet for you by putting a $5 chip on the Pass Line
directly in front of you. Then, he puts the four remaining $5 chips in the apron in front of
you. Make sure you pick up the four remaining chips from the apron and place them in
your chip stack so the dealer doesnt think youre making a $25 Pass Line bet instead of
only a $5 bet.
Ready? Lets make your first-ever craps bet. While the stickman controls the dice
in the center of the table and banters, New shooter, coming out, new shooter, put a $5
chip inside the Pass Line directly in front of you. Thats it! You just made your first
craps bet. Exciting, isnt it? (See Figure 8-1.)
When the stickman sees that the dealers are ready and everyone has made all their
Flat bets, he pushes the dice to the next shooter who selects two and then throws the
come-out roll. For a Pass Line bet, the come-out roll can produce three possible
outcomes: 1) if a 7 or 11 appears, the Pass Line bet wins and the game ends, 2) if a craps
appears (i.e., a 2, 3, or 12), the Pass Line bet loses and the game ends, and 3) if a 4, 5, 6, 8,
9, or 10 appears, a point is established and the game continues until either the point
number appears again, in which case the Pass Line bet wins, or a 7 appears, in which case
the Pass Line bet loses.
If a point is established on the come-out roll, you cant remove your Flat Pass Line
bet. Other bets, such as Place bets, can be removed whenever you change your mind and
decide to take them down. Not so with the Flat Pass Line bet. For the Pass Line bet, the
come-out roll favors the player but then shifts to the house when a point is established.
Therefore, for a Pass Line bet, the price for getting an advantage on the come-out roll is
that you cant remove the bet once a point is established and the advantage swings to the
house. Again, once a point is established, you must leave your Flat Pass Line bet alone
until a win/lose decision is made. If you forget this rule and pick up your Pass Line bet
before a decision is made, the stickman will smack you on top of your head with his stick
and yell at you to put it back. Just kidding! The crew will simply remind you of the rule
and politely ask you to return the bet to the table.
The Pass Line bet is an even-money bet, which means you win the exact amount
that you bet. For example, if you make a $7 Pass Line bet and win, you win $7.
If you bet the Pass Line, its also called betting with the dice (as opposed to
betting against the dice) or betting the right way (as opposed to betting the wrong
way). If a Pass Line bet wins, the dice are said have passed. In the context of Pass Line
bets, pass means to win, so dont confuse it with passing the dice to the next shooter.
On the come-out roll, a Pass Line bet has a 2:1 player advantage. There are eight
ways to win on the come-out roll and only four ways to lose. Lets review. For a Pass
Line bet on the come-out roll, a 7 or 11 wins and a 2, 3, or 12 loses. There are six ways to
make a 7 and two ways to make an 11; therefore, there are eight ways (i.e., 6 + 2 = 8) to
win a Pass Line bet on the come-out roll. Theres one way to make a 2, two ways to make
a 3, and one way to make a 12; therefore, there are four ways (i.e., 1 + 2 + 1 = 4) to lose a
Pass Line bet on the come-out roll. Eight ways to win versus four ways to lose is written
in terms of odds as 8:4, which like a fraction reduces down to 2:1. Thats how we get a
Off Puck
Boxman Dealer
OFF
Dont
Come
ne
Dont Pass Bar

x Bar
4 5 Si 8 N i 10
PASS LINE
See
separate
figure to
view the
Center
Come
Section.
3 4 9 10 11
2 12
FIELD B
I 8
Dont Pass Bar
6G
$5 PASS LINE
Stickman
$5 Flat Pass Line Bet
Figure 8-1. Flat Pass Line Bet
Assume youre in player position #2 (refer to Figure 5-1 for player positions). In
this example, your $5 Flat Pass Line bet is placed in the Pass Line directly in front
of you as shown in the figure above.
Notice the black Off puck in the Dont Come box. The Off puck indicates that
theres no point established and a new game is about to start with a come-out roll.
2:1 advantage with a Pass Line bet on the come-out roll. But thats only on the come-out
roll. For a Pass Line bet after a point is established, the advantage shifts back to the
house. No matter what the point is (i.e., 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, or 10), there are always more ways
to make a 7 and lose than there are ways to make the point and win. The advantage that
you enjoy on the come-out roll for a Pass Line bet is outweighed by the disadvantage you
incur if a point number is rolled on the come-out. The net result is that the house
maintains a small advantage on the Pass Line bet, even when you make an Odds bet.
When a point is established, you can make a Free Odds bet, or take Odds on the
point. This is a bet on the point number in addition to the Flat Pass Line bet. The Odds
bet is a self-service bet, so you make this bet yourself by putting the chip(s) in the apron
directly behind your Pass Line bet. Theres no marked location on the table to define
where to put your chip(s) for an Odds bet. It goes in the apron one or two inches directly
behind your Pass Line bet. (See Figure 8-2.) This is called behind the line. (Youll
occasionally hear a dealer remind a player by saying, Sir, you dont have anything
behind the line. This means the player doesnt have an Odds bet on the point.) Make
sure your Odds chips arent in the Pass Line or touching the outside line of the Pass Line;
otherwise, the dealer might think theyre either part of the Pass Line bet or a Place bet on
the point.
If your Odds bet requires you to use different-denomination chips, put the higher-
denomination chips on the bottom of your stack. For example, if the point is 5 and you
want to make an $8 Odds bet, stack your chips so the $5 chip is on the bottom and the
three $1 chips are on the top of your stack. If you mix them up (called a barber pole) or
if you put the $1 chips on the bottom, the dealer will re-stack them. Avoid making the
dealer constantly fix your chips; stack them properly yourself. (See Figure 8-3.) I like to
slightly offset the lower-denomination chips on top to make sure the dealer sees the higher
denominations on the bottom. Offset them just barely enough so the stack doesnt look
out of alignment but so the dealer can clearly see that big chips are on the bottom.
Offsetting the chip stack isnt required, but I like to do it to ensure the dealer knows big
chips are on the bottom. When the shooter rolls the point and the Pass Line wins, the
dealer typically double-checks the total amount of your Odds bet and then pays
accordingly. However, sometimes the dealer is sloppy or lazy and misses the fact that you
have big chips on the bottom. So, offsetting the lower-denomination chips on top by just
a hair allows a lazy dealer to realize the full amount of your Odds bet.
You think, Theres a square or rectangle painted on the table for every other bet,
so why isnt there a little box for an Odds bet? Good question. The casino prefers that
you dont make Odds bets, so they dont have a spot painted on the table for them. Odds
bets pay off based on true odds, so the casino doesnt have any built-in advantage, but
neither does the player. Because its the only bet in craps that doesnt have a built-in
house advantage, the Odds bet is the best bet you can make. With the payoff based on
true odds, you can expect to break even over the long run with this bet. Not so with any
other bet on the table.
On Puck
Boxman Dealer
Dont
Come
ne
Dont Pass Bar

x Bar
4 5
ON
Si 8 N i 10
PASS LINE
See
separate
figure to
view the
Center
Come
Section.
3 4 9 10 11
2 12
FIELD B
I 8
Dont Pass Bar
6G
$5 PASS LINE
Stickman $5
$5 Odds Bet
$5 Flat Pass Line Bet
Figure 8-2. Pass Line with Odds Bets
Notice the white On puck in the 4 point box. This indicates the shooter rolled a 4
on the come-out roll to establish 4 as the point.
Notice the $5 Odds bet in the apron about one or two inches behind the Pass
Line. After the shooter establishes a point, you can then make an Odds bet.
Wrong Right
$1 $1
= $5
= $1
Figure 8-3. Right and Wrong Ways to Stack Chips
The stack on the left has the $1 and $5 chips mixed up (called a barber pole).
The stack on the right has all higher denominations on the bottom and all lower
denominations on top.
The minimum Odds bet is typically the table minimum as defined by the placard.
The placard also tells you the maximum amount of Odds you can take. Depending on the
casino, the maximum Odds available generally vary from two times your Flat Pass Line
bet to 100 times your Pass Line bet (written on the placard as 2x or 100x). For
example, if the table minimum is $5 and the maximum Odds allowed is 3x (i.e., three
times your Flat Pass Line bet), and if you make a Pass Line bet of $10, then you can make
an Odds bet on the point for as little as $5 (i.e., the table minimum) or as much as $30
(i.e., three times your Pass Line bet).
Heres where the math that you learned in Chapter 1 comes into play. The Odds
bet on the point is based on true odds, or the odds that a number will appear compared to
a 7. Lets review the data in Table 1-3c from Chapter 1.
NUMBER WAYS TO
ROLLED MAKE IT
7 6
6 or 8 5
5 or 9 4
4 or 10 3
3 or 11 2
2 or 12 1
Remember, for a Pass Line bet after a point is established, the bet wins if the point
is rolled before a 7, and it loses if a 7 is rolled before the point. Therefore, odds are based
on the number 7. For example, if the point is 6, the odds against rolling the point and,
therefore, winning the Pass Line bet are 6:5 (i.e., six ways to make a 7 and lose versus five
ways to make a 6 and win; therefore, 6:5). If the point is 5 or 9, the odds against winning
are 6:4 (which reduces down to 3:2). If the point is 4 or 10, the odds against winning are
6:3 (which reduces down to 2:1). Notice how the odds are based on the number of ways
to make a 7 compared to the number of ways to make the point number. These are true
odds with no built-in house advantage.
So, how much Odds can you put down for each point number? This is easy
because we memorized Table 1-3c in Chapter 1. Refer to Table 8-1 below for examples
of how much of Odds you can take behind the line for each point number. Table 8-1
assumes you play at my favorite casino on the Las Vegas Strip where, at the time of this
writing, they still offer 100x Odds. For a 100x Odds table, your Odds bet can be the
minimum (i.e., 1x), the maximum (i.e., 100x), or anything in between (i.e., 2x to 99x). It
depends simply on your bankroll and how much you want to risk.
Table 8-1. Examples of Odds Bet Amounts

POINT FLAT PASS MINIMUM 2x
100x ODDS
NUMBER LINE BET ODDS (1x) ODDS
6 or 8 $5 $5 $10 $500
5 or 9 $5 $6 $10 $500
4 or 10 $5 $5 $10 $500
Why is the Odds bet for the 5 or 9 a multiple of two (e.g., $6, $10, or $500 in
Table 8-1) when Odds bets for the other point numbers are multiples of five? To answer
that question, lets take this a step further and examine how we determine the Odds bet
amounts for each particular point number.
For a point of 6 or 8, the odds of making it compared to the 7 are 5:6 (i.e., five
ways to make a 6 or 8 compared to six ways to make a 7). Therefore, if you bet $5 in
Odds, you expect to win $6 if the point shows before a 7. Therefore, for the point
numbers 6 and 8, the Odds bet should be a multiple of five to ensure you get the full true
odds paid if you win. For example, if the point is 8 and you make an Odds bet of $10,
how much do you expect to be paid if your Odds bet wins? Thats right! Youre getting
the hang of it! You expect to win $12 for that $10 Odds bet. Why? Because the true
odds compared to the 7 are 5:6, which (as you know from your grade school math class on
fractions) equates to 10:12.
For a point of 5 or 9, the odds of making it compared to the 7 are 4:6, which
reduces to 2:3. This means that, for every $2 multiple, you win a $3 multiple. Therefore,
the Odds bet for the 5 or 9 should always be an even number (i.e., a multiple of 2). For
example, suppose the shooter rolls a point of 5 on the come-out. The dice feel like theyre
starting to heat up, so you decide to make an Odds bet on the point. For the 5 or 9, the
Odds bet should be an even number, so you decide to bet $8 in Odds. If the shooter then
rolls the point, how much does your Odds bet win? Very good! Your $8 Odds bet
wins $12. Remember, your Odds bet on the 5 or 9 should be a multiple of two (i.e., an
even number).
Heres an easy rule for determining how much youll win with an Odds bet on
the 5 or 9: Divide your Odds bet by 2, and then multiply by 3. For example, suppose the
shooter rolls a point of 9. The dice are really hot and the shooter makes point after point,
so you decide to live dangerously and make a $50 Odds bet (note that your Odds bet is an
even number). If the shooter rolls the point, how much does your Odds bet win? Thats
right! Outstanding! You win $75. Use the rule to figure it out: Divide the Odds bet by 2
(i.e., $50 divided by 2 = $25), then multiply by 3 (i.e., $25 x 3 = $75). Easy as pie!
For a point of 4 or 10, figuring out the Odds bet cant get any easier. The odds of
making a 4 or 10 compared to the 7 are 3:6, which reduces to 1:2. Notice that you can bet
in $1 multiples because for every $1 multiple you bet, you win a $2 multiple (i.e., you win
double your bet). The odds of making a 4 or 10 compared to the 7 are exactly half;
therefore, you expect to win twice as much as your bet. For example, suppose you make a
$5 Odds bet on the point of 4. (Remember, if the table minimum is $5, you must bet at
least $5 in Odds.) If the shooter rolls the point, you win $10 (i.e., $5 x 2 = $10). More
examples, if you bet $17 in Odds on the point of 10, you win $34. If you bet $23 in Odds
on the point of 4, you win $46.
Unlike the Flat Pass Line bet, you can pick up (remove) your Odds bet at any time.
You can make an Odds bet at any time, too. When you decide to make or remove an
Odds bet, do it while the stickman still controls the dice in the center of the table. Avoid
reaching down at the last second just as the shooter is about to roll; otherwise, the whole
table may yell at you, Watch your hands! (Its considered bad luck if the dice hit
someones hands. The losers have to blame their misfortune on something, so if the dice
hit your hands and a 7 shows, they blame you for causing the 7-out.) Lets go through a
scenario to illustrate what we mean by making or removing an Odds bet at any time.
1. The puck is OFF (black side up). A new game is about to start. You make a $5
Flat Pass Line bet.
2. The shooter rolls a 6 on the come-out; therefore, 6 is the point for this game.
3. The shooter looks lucky and you have a gut feeling that a 6 is going to hit
before a 7, so you make a $5 Odds bet behind the line.
4. The shooter rolls for five minutes, rolling number after number, except for the
point (i.e., 6) or the dreaded 7, either of which will end the game. You get a terrible gut
feeling that theres no way the shooter can keep rolling before a 7 shows. You can feel it;
that dreaded 7 is coming soon. So, you reach down and pick up your $5 Odds bet.
(Remember, you must leave the Flat Pass Line bet alone.)
5. The shooter rolls a 7 to end the game.
Wow, your gut feeling was right, just in the nick of time! Way to go! In this
scenario, the Flat Pass Line bet loses because a 7 appeared before the point number, so
you lose your $5 Flat bet. But you dont lose the $5 Odds bet that you made at the
beginning of the game because you picked it up (removed it) before the shooter rolled a
7-out.
Dont Pass Bet

A Dont Pass bet is almost the exact opposite of a Pass Line bet. Like the Pass
Line bet, the Dont Pass bet is a Flat bet that you make prior to the come-out roll. The
Dont Pass section is above the Pass Line clearly marked Dont Pass Bar 12, typically in
black letters. The Dont Pass is sometimes called the back line.
The rules for table minimum and maximum bets are similar to the Pass Line bet.
For example, if you see a red placard defining a $5 minimum and a $2,000 maximum, that
means your Flat Dont Pass bet has to be at least $5, but cant be more than $2,000.
The Dont Pass bet is a self-service bet, which means you make this bet yourself
by placing your chip(s) in the Dont Pass section.
For the Dont Pass bet, the come-out roll can produce four possible outcomes (note
how theyre almost exactly opposite of the Pass Line bet): 1) if a 7 or 11 appears, the
Dont Pass bet loses and the game ends; 2) if a 2 or 3 appears, the Dont Pass bet wins and
the game ends; 3) if a 12 appears, its considered a tie and the bet doesnt win or lose, and
the game ends; and 4) if a 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, or 10 appears, a point is established and the game
continues until either the point number appears again, in which case the Dont Pass bet
loses; or a 7 appears, in which case the Dont Pass bet wins. For the Dont Pass bet, you
hope the shooter rolls a craps on the come-out; or if a point is established, that she doesnt
make her point and, instead, rolls a 7-out (again, note how the Dont Pass is opposite of
the Pass Line bet).
The Bar 12 part of the Dont Pass label indicates that a 12 on the come-out roll
is a tie. Some casinos have Bar 2, which means a 2 on the come-out is a tie. Whether
the bar is 12 or 2 doesnt matter because the odds are the same (i.e., theres only one way
to make a 12 and only one way to make a 2). However, some casinos like to stick it to its
patrons by having a Bar 3. You probably wont see this because its so rare, but it does
exist. Unlike the 12 or 2 that have only one way to make either number, there are two
ways to make a 3. This small difference increases the house advantage from its
normal 1.4% to about 4.4%. If I see a Bar 3 in a casino, I immediately turn around, walk
out, and go to another casino. The house already has an advantage over the player, so the
idea of the casino screwing the player even more really chaps my rear end, so I refuse to
give them my business.
Remember, the Dont Pass is basically the opposite of the Pass Line. Therefore,
unlike the Flat Pass Line bet, you can remove your Flat Dont Pass bet at any time after a
point is established. For the Dont Pass, the come-out roll favors the house but then shifts
to the player after a point is established. Therefore, after a point is established, the house
actually wants you to remove your Dont Pass bet because you have the advantage.
Unlike the Pass Line, you cannot put a Flat Dont Pass bet and you cannot
increase your Flat Dont Pass bet after a point is established. (Put bets are described
later.) Again, for the Dont Pass, the come-out roll favors the house but after the
come-out roll when a point is established, the Dont Pass favors the player. Therefore, the
house wont allow you to wait until a point is established to put a Flat Dont Pass bet. If
you want to bet the Dont Pass, the house requires you to go through the come-out roll.
The Dont Pass bet is an even-money bet, which means you win the exact amount
that you bet. For example, if you make a $5 Dont Pass bet and win, you win $5.
If you bet the Dont Pass, its also called betting against the dice (as opposed to
betting with the dice) or betting the wrong way (as opposed to betting the right
way).
On the come-out roll, a Dont Pass bet has an 8:3 house advantage. For the player,
there are three ways to win on the come-out, eight ways to lose, and one way to tie. Lets
review. For a Dont Pass bet on the come-out roll, a 7 or 11 loses, a 2 or 3 wins, and a 12
ties. There are six ways to make a 7 and two ways to make an 11; therefore, there are
eight ways to lose a Dont Pass bet on the come-out. Theres one way to make a 2 and
two ways to make a 3; therefore, there are three ways to win a Dont Pass bet on the
come-out. Eight ways to lose versus three ways to win is written in terms of odds as 8:3.
Thats how we get an 8:3 house advantage with a Dont Pass bet on the come-out. But
thats only for the come-out roll. For a Dont Pass bet after the point is established, the
advantage shifts back to the player. No matter what the point is (i.e., 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, or 10),
there are always more ways to make a 7 and win than there are ways to make the point
and lose. The advantage that you enjoy after the come-out roll for a Dont Pass bet is
outweighed by the 8:3 disadvantage you have to survive on the come-out. The net result
is that the house maintains a small advantage on the Dont Pass bet, even when you make
an Odds bet.
After a point is established, you can make a Free Odds bet, or lay Odds on the
point. Notice for the Dont Pass bet, the Odds bet is called laying Odds; whereas, for
the Pass Line bet, its called taking Odds. The Odds bet is another bet against the point
number in addition to the Flat Dont Pass bet.
The Odds bet is a self-service bet, so you make this bet yourself by putting the
chip(s) next to your Flat Dont Pass bet in the Dont Pass section. Like the Pass Line bet,
theres no marked location on the table to define where to put your chip(s) for an Odds
bet. The location for your Dont Pass Odds bet is next to your Flat bet. See Figure 8-4.
Unlike the Pass Line bet where the chips are all stacked in one pile behind the Flat
bet, the Dont Pass Odds bet is either heeled or bridged. To understand what heeled and
bridged mean, we should first review true odds and how much Odds we need to lay on
the Dont Pass.
On Puck
Boxman Dealer
Dont
Come
ne
Dont Pass Bar

x Bar
4 5 Si 8
ON
N i 10
PASS LINE
See
separate
figure to
view the
Center
Come
Section.
3 4 9 10 11
2 12
FIELD B
I 8
$5 $1
$5$1
$5 Dont Pass Bar
6G
PASS LINE
Stickman
$12 Odds Bet
$5 Flat Dont Pass Bet
Figure 8-4. Location of the Dont Pass with Odds Bets
Assume youre in player position #1 (refer to Figure 5-1 for player positions). In
this example, your $5 Flat Dont Pass bet is placed in the Dont Pass line directly
in front of you as shown in the figure above. Your Dont Pass Odds bet is placed
next to your Flat Dont Pass bet in the Dont Pass line. In this example, your
Odds bet amount is $12 (i.e., assume the two bottom chips are $5 chips and the
two top chips are $1 chips).
Notice the white On puck in the 8 point box. The On puck indicates that the
point for this game is 8. Because you bet the Dont Pass, you hope a 7 shows
before the point (i.e., 8).
The Dont Pass Odds bet against the point is based on true odds, or the odds that
a 7 will appear compared to a point number. Lets review the data in Table 1-3c from
Chapter 1.
NUMBER WAYS TO
ROLLED MAKE IT
7 6
6 or 8 5
5 or 9 4
4 or 10 3
3 or 11 2
2 or 12 1
Remember, for a Dont Pass bet after a point is established, the bet wins if a 7 is
rolled before the point, and loses if the point is rolled before a 7. Therefore, like the Pass
Line bet, odds are based on the number 7. For example, if the point is 6, the odds of
rolling a 7 and winning the Dont Pass bet are 6:5 (i.e., six ways to make a 7 and win
versus five ways to make a 6 and lose; therefore, 6:5). If the point is 5 or 9, the odds of
winning are 6:4 (which reduces down to 3:2). If the point is 4 or 10, the odds of winning
are 6:3 (which reduces down to 2:1).
So, how much Odds can you lay for each point number? This may seem a bit
trickier than taking Odds on the Pass Line bet, but its not. Its simply the exact
opposite of the Pass Line Odds bet. For the Dont Pass bet after a point is established, the
player has the advantage because there are more ways to win than to lose (i.e., there are
more ways to make a 7 than ways to make any of the point numbers). Since were dealing
with true odds, and since the player has an advantage over the house, you must bet more
in Odds than the amount you expect to win.
As you recall, for a Pass Line Odds bet on the point of 6 or 8, if you take $5 in
Odds behind your Pass Line bet, you expect to win $6 for that $5 Odds bet. The Dont
Pass Odds bet is the exact opposite. Therefore, for the Dont Pass bet and a point of 6
or 8, you have the advantage after the come-out roll so you must lay $6 in Odds and
expect to win $5.
For the point of 5 or 9, the true odds are 3:2 (i.e., six ways to make a 7 versus four
ways to make a 5 or 9), which means you lay a multiple of 3 to win a multiple of 2. For
example, suppose you make a $5 Flat Dont Pass bet and the shooter rolls a point of 9.
You have a gut feeling that the dice are cold and a 7 will appear, so you decide to lay
maximum Odds on the point. Suppose the table maximum allowable Odds for the 5 or 9
is 4x; which means, with your $5 Flat bet, the most you can win for an Odds bet is $20
(i.e., $5 x 4 = $20). Therefore, to win $20 on a Dont Pass Odds bet, you must lay $30
because the true odds are 3:2. Remember, there are six ways to make a 7, and four ways
to make a 9 (hence, the odds of 6:4 or 3:2). With a Dont Pass bet, you have the
advantage after a point is established, so if you want to lay an Odds bet, you have to lay
your fair share.
For the point of 4 or 10, the true odds are 2:1 (i.e., six ways to make a 7 versus
three ways to make a 4 or 10), which means you lay exactly double what you expect to
win. For example, suppose you make an $8 Flat Dont Pass bet and the shooter rolls a
point of 4. Suppose the table maximum allowable Odds for the 4 and 10 are 100x, which
means for your $8 Flat bet, the most you can win for an Odds bet is $800 (i.e., $8 x 100 =
$800). The true odds of rolling a 7 versus a 4 are 2:1; therefore, you have to lay $1,600 in
Odds to win $800. Remember, for a Dont Pass bet after a point is established, you have
the advantage so your Odds bet must be the higher amount to win the lower amount.
Dont worry if youre a bit confused. Well walk through a scenario in a few
minutes.
Now that we know how much Odds we must lay for a Dont Pass bet, lets get
back to heeling and bridging. Remember, for the Pass Line Odds bet, you put the
higher-denomination chips on the bottom of your Odds bet stack and the lower-
denomination chips on the top of the stack. The same is true for the Dont Pass Odds bet
(i.e., higher-denomination chips go on the bottom, lower denominations go on top).
If the payoff for a Dont Pass Odds bet equals the amount of the Flat bet, then the
Odds bet is bridged. The part of your Odds bet thats equal to the Flat bet is placed
directly next to the Flat bet. Then, the rest of the Odds bet is placed on top bridging
them. For example, suppose you make a $5 Dont Pass bet and the shooter rolls a point
of 8. Knowing the true odds for the 8 are 6:5 (i.e., six ways to make a 7, and five ways to
make an 8), you then lay $6 in Odds with the hope of winning $5. In this example, if you
win the $6 Odds bet, you win $5, which exactly equals what you win with your $5 Flat bet
(i.e., your $5 flat bet is even money, which means you win $5). Therefore, since your Flat
bet and Odds bet win the same amount (i.e., $5 each), you bridge your $6 Odds bet by
placing a $5 chip directly next to your $5 Flat bet, and then placing the $1 chip so it
bridges the two $5 chips. See Figure 8-5 for an illustration of how the Dont Pass Odds
bet is bridged.
If the payoff for a Dont Pass Odds bet doesnt equal the amount of the Flat bet,
then the Odds bet is heeled. This means you place the bottom chip of your Odds bet chip
stack directly next to your Flat bet. Then, place all remaining Odds bet chips on top of
that single chip but offset and leaning on that bottom chip (i.e., your Odds bet chip stack is
crooked because its leaning on the bottom chip). See Figure 8-6 for an illustration of
how the Dont Pass Odds bet is heeled.
Still confused after looking at the illustrations in the figures? Thats okay, dont
get nervous. The dealer is always willing to help if you forget. After a couple of times, it
all makes sense. It wont take long before youre a pro. If youre not sure what to do the
$12 Lay Odds Bet Bridged
Dont Pass line

$1
$5 $5
Dont Pass
= $5
= $1
Figure 8-5. Bridging the Dont Pass Odds Bet
In this example, assume the point is either 6 or 8.

With your $10 Flat Dont Pass bet, you lay 1x Odds for $12. For a Dont Pass
Odds bet, you lay the bigger amount to win the smaller amount. In this example,
you lay $12 to win $10.
Because the Odds bet payoff ($10) equals the Flat bet payoff ($10), you bridge
your Odds bet chips by putting $10 next to your Flat bet and then bridging the
two $10 stacks with the two $1 chips.
$24 Lay Odds Bet Heeled

Dont Pass line $1
Dont Pass $5 $5
= $5
= $1
Figure 8-6. Heeling the Dont Pass Odds Bet
In this example, assume the point is either 6 or 8.

With your $5 Flat Dont Pass bet, you lay 4x Odds for $24. For a Dont Pass
Odds bet, you lay the bigger amount to win the smaller amount. In this example,
you lay $24 to win $20.
Because the Odds bet payoff ($20) doesnt equal the Flat bet payoff ($5), you
heel your Odds bet chips. Notice that the higher denominations are on the
bottom of the heeled stack.
first time you try it, simply tell the dealer, I want to lay some Odds but I dont know if it
should be bridged or heeled. The dealer asks, How much do you want to lay?
Suppose you say, Fifteen dollars to win ten. The dealer asks you to drop your chips on
the table (remember, dealers arent allowed to take anything, especially chips, directly
from a player), and then he properly heels or bridges them based on the amount of your
Flat bet. Youll quickly get the hang of it. Just dont be afraid to ask the dealer questions.
His job is not only to deal, but also to be friendly and help the players.
When playing the Dont Pass, you might consider controlling your emotions more
than when playing the Pass Line. By far, most people play the Pass Line even when the
table is ice cold (i.e., cold means everyone is rolling a 7-out and a point hasnt been
made since the last Ice Age). When the table goes cold, players become grouchy and
sometimes downright mad because they lose time after time. Your winning on the Dont
Pass adds to their frustration. In fact, they blame you and your Dont Pass bets for
causing the tables bad mojo. Youll hear all sorts of mumbling, such as, Its cold
because that butthead keeps betting the Dont. If you scream and clap every time your
Dont Pass wins, you make their misery worse. So, unless you enjoy pissing off people,
its best to simply remain calm on the outside and quietly pick up your Dont Pass
winnings. However, if you dont care, then go for it. Scream and clap as loud as you can.
Just be aware that everyone else at the table will hate you and blame you for their
misfortune.
Pass Line and Dont Pass Scenario
Now that we have all that gobbledygook about the Pass Line, Dont Pass, true
odds, taking Odds, and laying Odds whizzing around in our muddled brains, lets walk
through a scenario to make everything clear. The following scenario is an example of
making Pass Line, Pass Line Odds, Dont Pass, and Dont Pass Odds bets. The following
assumes the table minimum is $5, maximum is $2,000, and the maximum allowable Odds
are 10x.
1. A new shooter prepares to make a come-out roll for a new game. You make a
$5 Flat Pass Line bet. The shooter rolls a 3. The game ends immediately. For a Flat Pass
Line bet on the come-out roll, 3 is a craps. You lose $5. The dealer takes your $5 Flat
bet.
2. The same shooter prepares to make another come-out roll for a new game.
(Remember, a shooter loses the dice only when he rolls a 7-out, not when he rolls a craps.)
You make another $5 Flat Pass Line bet. The shooter rolls an 11. The game ends
immediately. For the Pass Line on the come-out, 11 is a winner. You win $5. The dealer
places a $5 chip next to your Pass Line bet. Pick up your winnings, but leave your
original $5 chip on the Pass Line because a new game is about to start.
3. The same shooter rolls a 6 on the come-out; therefore, the point for this game
is 6. You take $5 in Odds on the point behind the line.
4. After a point is established, the only numbers that matter for Pass Line and
Dont Pass bets are 7 and the point number. The shooter rolls a 4. The number 4 doesnt
matter, so the game continues.
5. The shooter rolls a 9, which doesnt matter, so the game continues.
6. The shooter rolls a 6 (i.e., the point). The game ends. Winner, winner,
chicken dinner! The point showed before a 7, so the Pass Line with Odds bets win. The
dealer pays you $5 for the Flat bet (pays even money) and $6 for the Odds bet (pays 6:5).
Pick up your winnings and your Odds bet. Leave your original $5 Flat bet on the Pass
Line because a new game is about to start.
7. The same shooter rolls a 7 on the come-out for this new game. The game ends
immediately. For the Pass Line on the come-out, 7 is a winner. You win $5. The dealer
places a $5 chip next to your Pass Line bet. Pick up your winnings, but leave your
original $5 chip on the Pass Line because a new game is about to start.
8. The same shooter rolls a 5 on the come-out; therefore, the point for this game
is 5. You take $6 in Odds on the point behind the line.
9. The shooter rolls a 12, which doesnt matter, so the game continues.
10. The shooter rolls a 7. The game ends. The stickman shouts, Seven-out!
Because a 7 showed before the point, you lose everything. The dealer takes your $5 Flat
bet and your $6 Odds bet. You decide the dice are turning cold, so you change tactics and
bet the Dont Pass. You make a $5 Flat Dont Pass bet. Because the shooter rolled a
7-out, the dice move clockwise around the table to the next player who wants to shoot.
11. The new shooter starts a new game by rolling a 12 on the come-out. The
game ends immediately. For the Dont Pass, a 12 is a tie. The dealer leaves your $5 chip
on the Dont Pass. The same shooter prepares to make another come-out roll for the next
new game.
12. The shooter rolls a 7 on the come-out. The game ends immediately. For the
Dont Pass on the come-out, 7 is a loser. You lose your $5 Flat Dont Pass bet. While the
shooter prepares to start a new game, you make another $5 Flat Dont Pass bet.
13. The shooter rolls a 4 on the come-out; therefore, the point for this game is 4.
Your gut tells you that the dice are ice cold. A gorgeous woman walks up to watch the
game. You fantasize about being James Bond, so you lay a whopping $50 in Odds against
the point. Although youre nervous as hell about making such a big bet, shes not at all
impressed because the loser next to you is also fantasizing and he plopped his entire $500
bankroll on the table.
14. The shooter rolls a 10, which doesnt matter, so the game continues. (You let
out silent sigh of relief that you didnt lose.)
15. The shooter rolls a 7. The stickman shouts, Seven-out! The game ends.
But a 7 is good for you because you bet the Dont Pass! Woohoo! A 7 showed before the
point so your Dont Pass and Odds bets win. You want to jump and scream, but that
wouldnt be cool, so you pretend to be calm. You think, Just call me Bond, James
Bond. The dealer pays you $5 for the Flat bet (pays even money) and $25 for the Odds
bet (pays 1:2, or $25 for a $50 bet). You pick up all your chips--reaching down with two
hands because they all wont fit in just one--and put them in your chip stack with a bit
more emphasis trying to get her attention. You think, Is she looking? Did she see me
win all that money? Im such a stud.
16. Your wife walks up to the table, puts her arm around you, and asks, Hi,
Honey, you winning? You look down at your chip stack and realize youre $30 ahead.
Woohoo! This is easy! You cant wait to make another quick $30. But before you can
put down a $5 chip on the Dont Pass, your wife says, You hungry? You reluctantly
respond, Yes, dear. Your wife takes all your chips and secures them safely in her purse.
You walk away dejected wondering if you can get away with eating at a fast-food joint
instead of having a long drawn-out dinner with endless conversation thatll keep you away
from the tables for two hours.
(Winner, winner, chicken dinner, seems to be a universal cheer for drunks at all
casinos across the country. The first time I heard it, I took a swig of beer and almost
choked from laughing so hard. The shooter made something like her fifth point in a row.
The table was on fire and the players were clapping and hollering. Every time the shooter
rolled her point, the drunk at the other end of the table jumped up and down screaming,
Winner, winner, chicken dinner! He didnt stop. Finally, the boxman told him to calm
down. Nobody knew what the heck he was talking about. Maybe now he could afford to
buy a bucket of chicken or something. I dont know, but we all thought it was hilarious.
Wherever I go--whether its Vegas, Atlantic City, or anywhere in between--I always hear
someone yell, Winner, winner, chicken dinner! Listen for it the next time you play.
Yes, Im guilty. Even I yelled it once when a shooter was blazing. Oh, well, when a
shooter is hot and everyone at the table is winning, no one cares how stupid anyone
sounds.)
Put Bet
A Put bet is a Pass Line bet that you make (or put down) after the come-out roll.
You typically see it when someone walks up to the table in the middle of a game and
wants to play the point number. The player will put a bet on the Pass Line after the
come-out roll. An Odds bet on the Put bet can then be made, if desired. As we know, a
Pass Line bet has a 2:1 advantage before the come-out roll but then has a disadvantage
after the come-out. So, with a Put bet, you give up that initial advantage before the
come-out roll and immediately accept a disadvantage. Thats what makes a Put bet a bad
idea, generally. The only time the Put bet makes sense is when the house allows a lot of
Odds and you bet a lot of Odds. In that case, a Put bet on the point number can have a
lower house advantage than Placing the point number (well discuss Place bets later).
Unless youre an experienced player and have a big bankroll to put at risk, avoid Put bets.
If you walk up to a table and cant wait for a new game to end, and if youre in love with
the point number and just have to play it, you wont be giving away much if you simply
avoid the Put bet and, instead, Place the point number.
Another type of Put bet is adding to a Pass Line bet during a game after you made
the normal Pass Line bet. For example, suppose you make a normal Pass Line bet for $5
and you take the maximum Odds allowed, which the placard says are 5x. That means
your maximum Odds bet behind a $5 Pass Line bet is $25 (i.e., $5 x 5 = $25). The
shooter seems to be on fire, rolling number after number. She rolls every number possible
except the point and the dreaded 7. You feel in your gut that shes going to hit the point,
so you want to increase your Odds bet, but you cant because youre already at the
maximum Odds allowed for your $5 Pass Line bet. To increase your Odds bet, you put
another $5 chip on your Pass Line bet bringing your total Pass Line bet to $10. Now, with
the maximum Odds allowed, which in this example are 5x, you can add another $25 to
your Odds bet bringing your total Odds bet to $50 (i.e., $10 x 5 = $50).
A Put bet can also be a Come bet made without going through the Come bets
come-out roll. (Confused? I explain Come bets in the next section.) If a game is already
in progress, you can immediately put a Come bet with its associated Odds bet. For
example, when the stickman controls the dice in the center of the table and you have the
dealers attention, simply drop the correct amount of chips in the Come area and tell the
dealer what you want. Suppose you drop $11 in chips for a Come bet on the 9 with Odds.
Simply tell the dealer, Put me on the Come nine with six dollars in Odds. The dealer
moves your chips to the proper spot in the 9 point box and puts down a $5 Flat Come
bet with $6 in Come Odds.
Come Bet
Come bets work like Pass Line bets but theyre made after the shooter establishes
a point. (You make a Pass Line bet before the shooter establishes a point; whereas, you
make a Come bet after the shooter establishes a point.)
The Flat Come bet is a self-service bet, which means you make this bet yourself by
placing your chip(s) in the Come box directly in front of you (the Come box is clearly
marked COME). After your Come point is established, the dealer moves your chip(s)
from the Come box to the point number box.
Like the Pass Line bet, you can take Odds on the Come point. However, the dealer
must make the Come Odds bet for you, so you simply drop your Come Odds chip(s) in the
Come area and tell the dealer, Odds on my Come. The dealer then places your Come
Odds chip(s) on top of your Flat Come bet, slightly offset. The slight offset indicates that
the top portion of the chip stack is the Odds bet and the bottom portion is the Flat bet.
When you place your chip(s) to make a Come bet, the very next roll is treated as
the come-out roll for that specific Come bet. The rules for winning, losing, or establishing
a point on the come-out roll for a Pass Line bet apply equally to the Come bet. When a
Come point is established, the Come point is marked by the Come chip itself (not another
puck). The dealer picks up your Come bet chip and positions it inside the Come point
number box. After a Come point is established, you can take true odds on that Come
point number, just as you can with the Pass Line bet.
You can make as many Come bets as you want. In fact, if the shooter is rolling
lots of numbers, other than the dreaded 7, you could have as many as seven Come bets
working at the same time (i.e., its possible to have a Come bet on each of the six point
numbers and one in the Come box).
See Figure 8-7 for an illustration of where Come bets are positioned on the layout.
If you have Come with Odds bets working on the come-out roll of a new game
(i.e., the shooter made his point to end the previous game, so the next roll is the come-out
roll for the new game), the Odds portions of your Come bets are considered automatically
off (i.e., not working and not in play); however, the Flat portions are considered on (i.e.,
working and in play). If the shooter rolls a 7 on the come-out for a new game, the Flat
Come bets lose but you dont lose the Odds bets. If a 7 shows on the come-out of a new
game, the dealer returns the Odds portions of your Come bets to you, and keeps the Flat
Come bets. If the shooter rolls a point number for which you have an established Come
with Odds bet, only your Flat portion wins because the Odds portion is considered
automatically off on the come-out roll of a new game.
You can decide to make your Come Odds working on the come-out roll of a new
game simply by telling the dealer, My Come Odds are working on the come-out. The
Come bets with Odds after their Come points were established
Dont
Come
e
Dont Pass Bar

ON
x n Bar
4 5$5
$5
Si 8 Ni$5$5
10 $5
$5
PASS LINE
See
separate
figure to
view the
Center
Come
$5
Section.
3 4 9 10 11
2 12
FIELD B
I 8
Dont Pass Bar
6G
PASS LINE
Stickman
Come bet before its Come point is established
Figure 8-7. Locations of Come Bets
Assume the point is 6 (see the white On puck).

Assume youre in player position #3 (refer to Figure 5-1 for player positions).
In this example, youve already made three Come bets for which Come points
were established (i.e., the 4, 9, and 10). Each bet comprises a $5 Flat Come bet
and a $5 Odds bet. The Odds portion is identified by the offset chip on top of the
Flat bet chip.
In this example, you also have a new Flat Come bet in the Come box. The
shooters next roll will establish this Comes point. When the Come point is
established, the dealer moves the $5 chip from the Come box to the point box, at
which time you can take Odds on the Come point.
dealer will then put a small button labeled ON on top of your Come Odds bets. Then, if
the shooter rolls a 7 on the come-out, you lose both the Flat portions and the Odds
portions of your Come bets (because you told the dealer you wanted the Odds in play on
the come-out). If the shooter rolls a point number for which you have an established
Come with Odds bet, you win both the Flat and Odds portions because you told the dealer
your Come Odds are working on the come-out.
If you make a new Come bet and the shooter rolls a point number for which you
already have an established Come bet, you win the established Come bet and your new
Come bet moves into the point box to replace it. For example, suppose you make a $5
Come bet and the shooter rolls a 6. Your Come bet moves to the 6 point box. You then
make another $5 Come bet and the very next roll is another 6. You win the first Come bet
that was established when the first 6 appeared on the prior roll, so the dealer removes the
first Come bet and places it, with your winnings, in the Come box for you to pick up. The
dealer then moves your second Come bet into the 6 point box.
If your second Come bet is the same amount as your first one, the dealer typically
leaves the chips in their place and just pays your winnings. Rather than removing your
first Come bet and then replacing it with your second Come bet, the dealer saves time by
leaving everything in its place and just paying your winnings, which he places next to
your second Come bet chip. This called off and on. As the dealer pays your winnings,
he says something like, Off and on for eleven dollars. Dont forget to pick up your
winnings; otherwise, the dealer thinks youre adding them to your next Come bet.
I know this sounds terribly confusing, so lets run through a scenario to make
Come bets easy to understand. Trust me, it is, indeed, easy! Remember, a Come bet is
just like a Pass Line bet but is made after the shooter establishes a point. Think of Come
bets as your own personal Pass Line bets independent of the shooters point.
$5 Flat Pass Line bet. The shooter rolls a 10; therefore, the point for this game is 10. You
feel a bit bold, so you take $15 in Odds on the point behind the line.
2. After a point is established, the only numbers that matter for Pass Line bets
are 7 and the point number. The shooter rolls a 4. The number 4 doesnt matter, so the
game continues.
3. You think maybe its time to make your first-ever Come bet. You bite your lip
and think for a moment, Man, I hope I do this right. Im going to look really stupid if I
do it wrong. You grab a $5 chip and fiddle with it in your hand. The stickman is ready
to push the dice to the shooter for her next roll. What the hell, lets do it. You quickly
place the $5 chip in the Come box just as the stickman pushes the dice to the shooter.
4. The shooter rolls an 11. For your Pass Line bet, an 11 doesnt matter. For your
Come bet, this roll is treated as the come-out roll, so an 11 on the come-out roll for your
Come bet wins. The dealer places a $5 chip (pays even money) next to your Come bet
chip. Pick up your winnings, but leave the original Come bet chip there because you want
to make another Come bet on the next roll.
5. The shooter rolls a 5. For your Pass Line bet, a 5 doesnt matter. For your
Come bet, this roll is treated as the come-out roll, so your Come point is 5. The dealer
moves your Come bet chip to the 5 point box. You decide to take $6 in Odds on your
Come point, so you place $6 worth of chips in the Come area and tell the dealer, Six
dollar Odds on my Come. The dealer takes your $6 in chips and places them on top of
your $5 Flat Come bet, slightly offset. The offset indicates that the top portion of the chip
stack is the Come Odds and the bottom portion is the Flat Come.
6. The shooter rolls a 3. For both the Pass Line bet and the Come bet, a 3 doesnt
matter. The game continues.
7. The shooter rolls an 8. For both the Pass Line bet and the Come bet, an 8
doesnt matter. The game continues.
8. The shooter rolls a 10 (i.e., her point). The game is over. Winner, winner,
chicken dinner! The shooters point showed before a 7, so the Pass Line with Odds bets
win. The dealer pays you $5 for your Flat Pass Line bet (pays even money) and $30 for
your Odds bet (pays 2:1, or $30 for your $15 bet). Pick up your winnings and your
original Odds bet. Leave your original $5 Flat bet on the Pass Line because a new game is
about to start and you want to make another Pass Line bet. For your Come bet, a roll
of 10 doesnt matter, so nothing happens with your Come bet. Because the shooter rolled
her point of 10 to end the game, a new game is about to start. For the come-out roll of a
new game, only your Flat Come bet is working; your Come Odds bet is automatically off.
9. The same shooter rolls a 7 on the come-out for this new game. 7 is a natural, so
the game ends immediately. For the Pass Line on the come-out, 7 is a winner. You win
$5 (pays even money), so the dealer places a $5 chip next to your Pass Line bet. Pick up
your winnings, but leave your original $5 chip on the Pass Line because a new game is
about to start. For your Come bet, a 7 showed before your Come point of 5, so you lose
your Come bet. But, since this was the come-out roll for a new game, you lose only the
Flat portion of your Come bet. The dealer returns your Come Odds to you by placing
them in the apron directly in front of you (dont forget to pick up your chips), and then the
dealer takes the Flat Come bet.
10. The same shooter rolls a 6 on the come-out roll for the next new game;
therefore, the point for this game is 6. You take $5 in Odds on the point behind the line.
You decide to make a Come bet, so you place a $5 chip in the Come box.
Come bet, 8 becomes your Come point, so the dealer moves your Come bet to the 8 point
box. You place another $5 chip in the Come box and tell the dealer, Five dollar Odds on
my Come. The dealer places your $5 chip on top of your $5 Flat Come bet, slightly
offset.
12. The shooter rolls a 12. For both your Pass Line bet and Come bet, a 12
Come bet, the shooter rolled your Come point before a 7, so you win. Woohoo! The
dealer removes your Come with Odds bets and places them in the Come box. He then
pays your winnings, which are $5 for your Flat Come (pays even money) and $6 for your
Come Odds (pays 6:5). Pick up all your winnings and your original Flat Come with Odds
bets. Now, since your Come bet won and was removed along with your Come winnings,
the only bets you have on the table are the Pass Line with Odds bets.
14. The game continues, and you continue raking in the money. You think,
James Bond aint got nothing on me!
Dont Come Bet

Dont Come bets work just like Dont Pass bets but theyre made after the shooter
establishes a point. (You make a Dont Pass bet before the shooter establishes a point;
whereas, you make a Dont Come bet after the shooter establishes a point.)
The Flat Dont Come bet is a self-service bet, which means you make this bet
yourself by placing your chip(s) in the Dont Come box (the Dont Come area is clearly
marked Dont Come Bar 12). After the Dont Come point is established, the dealer
moves your Flat Dont Come chip(s) to the Dont Come area of the point box. For the
Dont Come Odds bet, the dealer must make this bet, so you simply drop your Dont
Come Odds chip(s) in the Dont Come box and tell the dealer, Lay Odds on my Dont
Come. The dealer then places your Dont Come Odds chip(s) next to your Flat Dont
Come bet in the Dont Come portion of the point box, either bridged or heeled. See
Figure 8-8 for an illustration of where Dont Come bets are positioned on the layout.
When you make a Dont Come bet, the very next roll is treated as the come-out
roll for that Dont Come bet. The rules for winning, losing, or establishing a point on the
come-out roll for a Dont Pass bet apply equally to the Dont Come bet. If a Dont Come
point is established, it is marked not by another puck, but by your Dont Come chip itself.
The dealer picks up your Dont Come chip and positions it in the Dont Come point
number box. After establishing a Dont Come point, you can lay Odds against it, just as
you did with the Dont Pass bet. You can make as many Dont Come bets as you want
(i.e., like the Come bet, you can have as many as seven Dont Come bets working at
once).
If you have Dont Come with Odds bets working on the come-out roll of a new
game (i.e., the shooter made his point to end the previous game, so the next roll is the
come-out roll for the next game), the Odds portion of your Dont Come bets are
considered still on and working (note that this is the opposite of Come bets). Most people
choose to leave their Dont Come Odds working on the come-out roll of a new game. On
the come-out of a new game, everyone is typically rooting for a 7 because its a winner for
the Pass Line. Even if you dont have a Pass Line bet, youre also rooting for a 7 on the
come-out because its a winner for your Dont Come bet.
Like the Dont Pass bet, you can remove a Dont Come bet at any time (because
after a Dont Come point is established, you have the advantage, so the house actually
wants you to remove it). Sometimes youll hear a player say, No action, after a Dont
Come point is established. This means the player wants to immediately remove the Dont
Come bet from that point number and leave the bet in the Dont Come box to make
another Dont Come bet. For example, suppose a player makes a $5 Dont Come bet and
the shooter rolls a 6; thereby, making the players Dont Come point number 6, which is
one of the easiest numbers to make (i.e., there are five ways to make a 6). The player
might think, Man, six is an easy number to make and Id rather wait for a Dont Come
point of four or ten, so Im going to tell the dealer no action. The player thinks that, if he
waits for a Dont Come point number of 4 or 10, he has a better chance of winning. As
we know, 4 and 10 are the hardest point numbers to make (i.e., each number has only
three ways to make it). But the player isnt thinking with a clear head. Actually, he
doesnt have a clue what hes doing. Most likely, hes trying to act as if hes a craps
know-it-all when, in fact, hes a craps idiot. Why?
As with the Dont Pass, the player has the biggest disadvantage with a Dont Come
bet on the come-out roll. Then, once a Dont Come point is established, the advantage
shifts to the player. Remember, there are always more ways to make a 7 than ways to
make any of the point numbers. So, even if the Dont Come point is 6, the player still has
Dont Come Flat Bet with Odds after its Dont Come point was established
$5
$5
$5
$5
Dont
This row Come
e
Dont Pass Bar

ON
of boxes
x n Bar
is for
Lay and
4 5 Si 8 Ni 10 $5
PASS LINE
Dont
Come
bets.
Come
3 4 9 10 11
2 12
FIELD B
I 8
Dont Pass Bar
6G
PASS LINE
Stickman
Dont Come Flat bet before its Dont Come point is established
Figure 8-8. Locations of Dont Come Bets
Assume the point is 6 (see the white On puck).

In this example, youve already made one Dont Come bet for which the Dont
Come point of 5 was established. The bet comprises a $5 Flat Dont Come bet
and a $15 Odds bet (i.e., you bet $15 to win $10). Since the Odds payoff doesnt
equal the Flat payoff, the Odds chips are heeled. Notice that the two $5 chips are
heeled on the edge of the bottom $5 chip.
In this example, you also have a new Flat Dont Come bet in the Dont Come box.
The shooters next roll will establish this Dont Comes point. When the Dont
Come point is established, the dealer moves the $5 chip from the Dont Come box
to the Dont Come area of the point box, at which time you can Lay Odds.
the advantage because there six ways to make a 7 (the Dont Come wins), and only 5
ways to make a 6 (the Dont Come loses). Therefore, it makes no sense to no action a
Dont Come bet after its come-out roll when you have the advantage. If you no action a
Dont Come bet after its come-out roll, you give the advantage back to the house by
having to go through another come-out roll. The more times a player takes this no
action approach, the greater his loss will be over the long run. Therefore, dont do it.
Place Bet
A Place bet is a standing bet, meaning the bet stays working, or standing, until it
wins or loses, or until you remove it. A Place bet can be made on any of the point
numbers: 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, and 10. Like the Pass Line bet, a Place bet works against the
number 7. After making a Place bet, the only numbers that matter are the Place number
and 7; all other numbers are meaningless. After making a Place bet, each subsequent roll
can produce one of three outcomes: 1) a 7 shows and your Place bet loses, 2) the Place
number shows and your Place bet wins, or 3) any other number shows and nothing
happens to your Place bet (i.e., all others number have no affect on your Place bet).
Place bets dont pay off according to true odds. Instead, the house gets its
advantage by paying them off at less than true odds (i.e., they screw the player by not
paying their fair share when the player wins). Table 8-2 shows how Place odds compare
to true odds.
Table 8-2. Place Odds versus True Odds

NUMBER PLACE ODDS TRUE ODDS
2:1
4 and 10 9:5
(or 10:5)
7:5 3:2
5 and 9
(or 14:10) (or 15:10)
7:6 6:5
6 and 8
(or 35:30) (or 36:30)
As you can see, the Place odds arent quite as good as true odds. The house
screws the player to make money by paying less than true odds. For a winning $5 bet on
the 4 or 10, the Place odds pay only $9, but the true odds say we should be paid $10. For
a winning $10 bet on the 5 or 9, the Place odds pay only $14, but the true odds say we
should be paid $15. And for a winning $30 bet on the 6 or 8, the Place odds pay only $35,
but the true odds say we should be paid $36.
You think, How much do I put down to make a Place bet? As always, the bet
amount depends on the odds.
The Place odds for the 4 and 10 are 9:5, and the Place odds for the 5 and 9 are 7:5.
Therefore, Place bets for the 4, 5, 9, and 10 should be in multiples of $5. For example, a
winning $10 Place bet on the 4 gets you $18. A winning $15 Place bet on the 9 gets you
$21. Dont let the math scare you! Since these bets are in multiples of $5, simply divide
your bet by 5 and then multiply by the winning odds to determine your winning amount.
So, for your $10 Place bet on the 4 (which has Place odds of 9:5), $10 divided by 5 = $2,
and $2 x 9 = $18. For your $15 Place bet on the 9 (which has Place odds of 7:5),
$15 divided by 5 = $3, and $3 x 7 = $21.
The Place odds for the 6 and 8 are 7:6, which means the bet should be in multiples
of $6. For example, a winning $12 Place bet on the 6 gets you $14. A winning $30 Place
bet on the 8 gets you $35. Do the math. For your $30 Place bet on the 8 (which has Place
odds of 7:6), $30 divided by 6 = $5, and $5 x 7 = $35.
Memorize the Place odds now. Take a minute to do it now. Know the difference
between Place odds and true odds. Learn it so you dont have to think about it.
Remember, you dont want to look like a newbie fumbling around with how much to put
down for each Place number. (James Bond never asked the dealer, Um, excuse me, how
much is the six?) However, if you have trouble remembering the Place odds the first
time you play, dont be afraid to ask the dealer how much to drop. Itll be as easy as pie
after 15 minutes at the table.
If youre like me, youll search out and play a table with a $3 minimum bet instead
of the typical $5 or $10 minimum. Suppose you find a $3 table (a few are still left in the
middle of the Vegas Strip). Since the minimum bet is only $3, you can make $3 Place
bets, but you dont get the full Place odds. The payoff odds for a $3 Place bet on the
6 or 8 are 1:1, or even money. For the 5 or 9, its 4:3 (i.e., your $3 bet wins $4). For the
4 or 10, its 5:3 (i.e., your $3 bet wins $5).
For a $3 Place bet, you get a little less than full Place odds because the lowest chip
denomination at the craps table that casinos allow is generally $1, so they cant pay you a
fraction of a dollar (i.e., cents). For example, suppose you make a $3 Place bet on the 5.
The full Place odds are 7:5, but the reduced payoff odds for a $3 bet are only 4:3. Why?
Because it gives the casino another excuse to stick it to the player! The roulette table has
chips for 25 cents or 50 cents, so why cant the craps table have chip denominations less
than $1? Thats right. They screw you again! The full Place odds are 7:5, which means
for a $3 Place bet on the 5, we divide $3 by 5 = 60 cents, and then multiply 60 cents
by 7 = $4.20. So, for a $3 Place bet on the 5 or 9 with full Place odds of 7:5, we expect to
be paid $4.20 when we win. The craps table doesnt have 20-cent chips, so the casino
rounds down to $4.
Lets look at a $3 Place bet on the 4 or 10. The full Place odds are 9:5, which
means we divide $3 by 5 = 60 cents, and then multiply 60 cents by 9 = $5.40. So, for a $3
Place bet on the 4 or 10 with full Place odds of 9:5, we expect to win $5.40, but the casino
rounds down to $5. (Notice how the casino rounds down instead of up.) The player isnt
giving up much by making $3 Place bets, so if you have a limited bankroll, these bets are
fun and give you more action than just Pass Line bets. The point is, be aware that you get
a little less than full Place odds and increase the house advantage when you make $3 Place
bets.
As youve seen, full Place odds arent as good as true odds. Thats how the house
maintains its advantage. Remember, the house is in business to make money, not to
gamble. Over time, the house wins because when you lose, you pay the true odds; but
when you win, the house pays you less than true odds. So, by paying less than their fair
share when you win, the house cant help but come out a winner over the long haul. Lets
look closer at how the house screws the player.
Lets look at the number 4. As we learned earlier, the true odds for making a 4
compared to a 7 are 1:2 (i.e., three ways to make a 4 compared to six ways to make a 7,
which is 3:6, which reduces down to 1:2). Therefore, since the number 7 is twice as easy
to make as a 4, we expect to get paid twice as much as our bet when we win. For
example, if we bet $5 on the 4 to hit before the 7, we expect to get $10 when we win (i.e.,
$5 x 2 = $10). However, for a Place bet on the 4, the payoff odds are only 9:5. This is
close to 2:1, but not quite. Therefore, if we make a $5 Place bet on the 4 and win, the
house pays us only $9. When the house loses, they dont pay the true odds; they pay only
$9 instead of $10 and keep that extra dollar. You think, For my $5 bet, I win $9, so I
dont care if they screw me out of that extra $1. Its only a buck. Okay, but think of it
this way. Thats only one Place bet made by one player during one game. Imagine
keeping that extra dollar when other people at the table make that same bet, multiplied by
the number of tables in action, multiplied by the number of hours in a day, multiplied by
the number of days in a month, and so on. Its easy to see how the house rakes in the
money over the long haul.
You can make or remove Place bets at any time during a game. You can also
make them while the puck is OFF (before a new come-out roll), but typically, dealers
prefer that you wait until a point is established and then make your Place bets.
Occasionally, you see a player try to make a Place bet while the puck is OFF by asking,
Can you Place the six for me now, please, so I dont forget after the come-out? The
dealer usually obliges (as he should; after all, youre the customer), but sometimes a
dealer in a bad mood will ask the player to wait until a point is established.
Dealers who ask you to wait to make a Place bet until after a point is established
do so because theyre lazy. Suppose you Place the 6 before the come-out and the dealer
moves your chip into the 6 point box. The shooter then rolls a 6 for the point. The dealer
moves the ON puck into the 6 point box, and then has to ask, Sir, what do you want to do
with your six? Since your Pass Line bet covers the 6 (because 6 is now the point), you
likely dont want it covered again by your Place bet. The dealer then has to move your
Place 6 to whatever other number you want, or return it to you if you decide to take it
down. You think, Gee, wow, that sure is a lot of extra work for the dealer. Youre
right, its no effort at all, but its amazing how many dealers--even good ones--dont like
moving your Place bets around because you couldnt wait until after the point was
established to make them.
You can make as many Place bets as you want, up to a maximum of six (i.e., the 4,
5, 6, 8, 9, and 10), including the point. Yes, you can Place the point. For example,
suppose you walk up to a table and see an ON puck in the 6 point box (i.e., a game is in
progress and the shooters point is 6). Suppose you love the number 6 and you want
immediate action, but you dont want to make a Put bet so you decide to Place the
shooters point. To do this, place your chips centered directly on the bottom line of the
Pass Line (i.e., the line that separates the Pass Line from the apron). See Figure 8-9 for an
illustration of how to Place the point by putting your chip on the back line of the Pass
Line. As long as you center your chips on that line, the dealer knows its a Place bet on
the shooters point instead of Put bet in the Pass Line. If you dont want to make your
Place bet this way, simply drop your chips in the Come box and tell the dealer, Place the
point, please. The dealer then moves your chips to the point box.
The dealer positions all Place bets (except when you Place the shooters point
yourself), so you have to put your chips on the table and tell the dealer what you want.
Then, the dealer puts them in the proper position in the point box for the number you want
to Place. To an untrained eye, players chips appear to be scattered all over the point
boxes. To the contrary, its well organized. Each player position has a corresponding
chip position for each point box. See Figure 8-9 for an illustration of where the dealer
positions players Place bets according to the players table positions. Note: the same is
true for Lay bets, Come bets, and Dont Come bets. For all bets in and around the point
boxes, players chip locations correspond to their positions at the table.
The following Dos and Donts describe how to make a Place bet.
--DO remember not to make any bets when the stickman is about to push the dice
to the shooter for the next roll. Instead, do it while the stickman controls the dice in the
middle of the table.
--DO wait until you have the dealers attention before putting your chips on the
table. If the dealer is busy paying or arranging other bets, dont put any chips on the table
until you have his attention. Except for self-service bets, never put chips on the table
without the dealer knowing theyre yours.
--DONT throw or toss your Place-bet chips on the table because they might
bounce and roll into the point boxes, which may be filled with other peoples Place bets,
Come bets, or other bets. If your chips mess up the dealers neatly arranged chips in the
point boxes, youll likely get a less-than-pleasant look and hell tell you not to do it again.
--DO put your chips in the Come box and tell the dealer what you want, such as,
Place the eight, please. Saying please is always a nice touch. Some dealers have
specific spots where they prefer you to put your chips, depending on your position at the
table. For example, if you stand next to the dealer, he may prefer you to put your chips in
the apron directly in front of you instead of in the Come box. If you put your Place-bet
chips in the Come box and the dealer doesnt say anything, then you should assume thats
where he wants you to put your chips for subsequent Place bets. Otherwise, he says
something like, Sir, please put your chips here in the apron.
Numbers in circles correspond to player-position numbers
Position #8
8 7 6 5 $5 $1 $1 $5
Dont
Come
Player
$5
ne
Dont Pass Bar

ON x Bar
4 5 Si 8 N i 10
PASS LINE
1 2 3 4 $5 $5 $1 $1 $1 $5 $5 $5
Position #7
Place bets go in these boxes
Player
Come
3 4 9 10 11
2 12
Position #6
FIELD B
I 8
Player
Dont Pass Bar
6G
PASS LINE 5
y er n #
a io
$5 = $5 Place bet
$1 = $6 Place bet ($5 chip on bottom, $1 on top)
Figure 8-9. Locations of Place Bets

(in the Point Box and on the Pass Line)
Circles in the 4 point box show where Place bets go in all point boxes for each
player position.
In this example, assume the point is 4 (see the white On puck). The following
Place bets are in action on the layout:
Player #1 has Place bets on the 9 and 10.
Player #2 has Place bets on 6 and 8.
Player #5 has Place bets on the 5, 6, and 8.
Player #6 has: None (there are no chips in the #6 position in any of the point boxes).
Player #7 has a Place bet on the 9.
Player #8 has a Place bet on the 4 (the point). Notice how a Place bet on the point (in
this case, the 4) is positioned on the back line of the Pass Line in front of Player #8.
After your Place bet wins, you can choose to take it down (i.e., remove it) or leave
it up (i.e., working) and hope to hit your Place number again before a 7 shows. If you
leave your Place bet up, you win every time the shooter rolls that Place number, but lose
when a 7 shows. You can also increase or decrease the size of your Place bet at any time.
If you win, be prepared to tell the dealer what you want to do. The method for
paying off winning bets may appear at first to be entirely random, but its not. In fact, its
quite the opposite. The dealer pays off bets and players according to a strict sequence. He
pays all Pass Line bets first, then Come bets, and then all Place bets. The player next to
the stickman is always paid first (player position #1), and then the payoffs go around the
table to the player standing next to the dealer (player position #8). For example, suppose
three players each have a Come bet and a Place bet on the number 5. Player #1 stands
next to the stickman, player #2 stands at the end of the table along the corner, and player
#3 stands next to the dealer. The shooter rolls a 5 and everyone jumps for joy. The dealer
pays player #1s Come bet, player #2s Come bet, and players #3 Come bet, then player
#1s Place bet, player #2s Place bet, and finally player #3s Place bet. So, be aware of
when your bets will be paid. As the dealer pays bets in front of you and its almost your
turn to be paid, lean a little into the dealer and tell him what you want to do, such as,
Same bet, or Press it, or Take my five down. That way, the dealer can execute the
payoffs quickly and under control. Avoid screaming at the dealer the instant a number
shows and you win. The dealer must strictly adhere to the payoff sequence, so when he
gets around to paying you, he might forget what you screamed to him.
Some dealers are taught if a player doesnt say anything, the silence indicates that
she wants to make the same bet (i.e., same bet means she wants the dealer to pay her
winnings, and keep the same Place bet up and working). To ensure the dealer knows
exactly what I want, I always say, Same bet, please. Some dealers are sensitive (why, I
dont know) and respond, Sir, if you just dont say anything, Ill know you want the same
bet. I usually politely reply with something like, Most dealers arent as good as you, so
Im in the habit of saying same bet. That way, I can continue saying, Same bet, please,
without overly irritating the dealer.
As noted, you can make, remove, increase, or decrease a Place bet at any time.
You have two options for removing a Place bet: take it down or turn it off.
When taking down a Place bet, you remove it completely from the table. The
dealer removes your Place-bet chips from the point box and puts them in the apron in
front of you. (Dont forget to pick them up and put them in your chip stack.) Use this
approach when you no longer want action on a particular number for the rest of the game.
When turning off a Place bet, you turn it off (i.e., make it not working)
temporarily with the intent to turn it back on after one or more rolls. Instead of removing
your chips, the dealer places an OFF button on top of them. The button tells the boxman
and the camera that your Place bet isnt working for subsequent rolls. The dealer leaves
the OFF button on your chips until you tell him you want the bet working again. This
approach saves the dealer from having to remove and replace chips for players who like to
turn their Place bets off and on a lot.
If you have a Place bet working and the shooter makes her point to end the game,
your Place bet is automatically off on the come-out roll for the next new game. Your
Place bet is then automatically turned back on after a new point is established. However,
you can call your Place bet on at any time, even on the come-out roll. Simply tell the
dealer, My five is working on the come-out. The dealer then places an ON button on
top of your Place bet to show the boxman and camera that your bet is working on the
come-out. After a point is established, the dealer removes the ON button since the bet is
automatically understood to be on (i.e., working) after the come-out.
Depending on the point, Place numbers are considered either inside or outside.
Generally, for Place bets, the 4, 5, 9, and 10 are considered outside numbers; while the 5,
6, 8, and 9 are considered inside numbers. You think, What? He just said the 5 and 9 are
considered outside, and then he said theyre considered inside. Hes nuts!
The 5 and 9 may, indeed, be considered inside and outside, depending on the
circumstances. For example, suppose the point is 4 and you want Place bets on the 5, 6, 8,
and 9. Simply put $22 in the Come box and tell the dealer, Twenty-two dollars inside,
please. The dealer knows that you want $5 on the 5, $5 on the 9, $6 on the 6, and $6 on
the 8. Another example, suppose the point is 5 and you want to make Place bets on the 4,
9, and 10. Simply put $15 in the Come box and say, Fifteen dollars outside, please.
The dealer knows that you want $5 each on the 4, 9, and 10. If youre uncomfortable with
this inside and outside stuff, simply put down your chips and say, Place the four, five,
nine, and ten, instead of, Twenty dollars outside. Remember though, you want to
sound like James Bond and impress that gorgeous babe standing next to you. It sounds
cooler using the lingo.
Think youre ready to hang with James Bond? Lets see. Suppose you make a
Pass Line bet and the point is 6. You then drop some chips in the Come box and tell the
dealer, Sixteen dollars inside, please. What bets are you telling the dealer you want to
make? Wow, thats right! Very good! Since the point is 6 and you have a Pass Line bet,
you dont want to make an additional Place bet on the number 6. So, in this case, $16
inside, means you want Place bets for $5 on the 5, $6 on the 8, and $5 on the 9.
Lets do one more to see if youre truly worthy of hanging with James Bond.
Suppose you decide not to make a Pass Line bet on the next game. Instead, you decide to
make Place bets, so you drop some chips and say, Thirty-two across, please. What does
$32 across mean? Absolutely correct! Move over, James Bond, this reader is a natural!
The dealer knows you want Place bets on all the numbers, even the point, for $5 on the 4,
$5 on the 5, $6 on the 6, $6 on the 8, $5 on the 9, and $5 on the 10. (That all adds up
to $32.)
Lets run through a scenario to make Place bets easy to understand. In this
example, assume the table minimum bet is $5 and the maximum odds allowed are 10x.
feel cocky, so you take a whopping $20 in Odds on the point behind the line.
2. After a point is established, the only numbers that matter for Pass Line bets are
7 and the point number. The shooter rolls a 4. The number 4 doesnt matter, so the game
continues.
3. You think, Man, I want some more action. Im going to try some Place bets.
When you have the dealers attention, you drop a $5 chip in the Come box and say, Place
the nine, please. The dealer moves your chip to the 9 point box.
4. The shooter rolls an 11. For both your Pass Line bet and Place bet, an 11
5. The table is packed and you stand shoulder-to-shoulder between two gorgeous
women (or men). You think, Im going to show these babes just how good I am. With
the dealers attention, you drop $17 in chips in the Come box and say, Give me the rest
of the inside numbers, please. Since you already have a Place bet on the 9, the dealer
takes your chips and knows you want $5 on the 5, $6 on the 6, and $6 on the 8. You now
have Place bets on the 5, 6, 8, and 9.
6. The shooter rolls a 6. Your Place bet on the 6 wins. Just as its your turn to be
paid, you tell the dealer, Same bet, please. The dealer pays your winnings by placing $7
in chips in the apron directly in front of you. Pick up your winnings. Your Place bet on
the 6 is still up and working.
7. The shooter rolls a 12. For your Pass Line bet and all your Place bets, a 12
8. The shooter rolls another 6. Wow! The 6 is getting hot! Your Place bet wins
again. This time, just as its your turn to be paid, you tell the dealer, Press it. The
dealer knows you want to double your Place bet on the 6. He counts out your $7 in
winnings, and then puts $6 of it on your original Place bet on the 6, and he puts the
remaining $1 in the apron directly in front of you. Pick up the $1. Now, your Place bet
on the 6 is up to $12. Things are getting a bit more interesting, so you pay more attention
to the game and less attention to the babe next to you in her halter top rubbing against you
shoulder-to-shoulder.
9. The shooter rolls a 9. Your Place bet on the 9 wins. Just as its your turn to be
paid, you tell the dealer, Same bet, please. The dealer puts $7 in chips in the apron
directly in front of you. Pick up your winnings.
10. The shooter rolls a 10. Winner, winner, steak dinner! You high-five
everybody at that end of the table. The shooter rolled his point, so the game ends. The
dealer pays you $5 for your Flat Pass Line bet and $40 for your Odds bet. Pick up all your
chips. Youre excited because you got one of those pretty green $25 chips as part of your
winnings. The dealer turns the puck OFF and puts it on the side of the table.
11. A new game is about to start. Since this is the come-out roll for a new game,
all of your Place bets are automatically considered off. You make a $5 Flat Pass Line bet.
The shooter rolls a 7. The game ends immediately. For your Flat Pass Line bet, a 7 on the
come-out is a winner, so the dealer puts a $5 chip next to your Flat Pass Line bet. Pick up
your $5 in winnings. For all of your Place bets, the 7 doesnt matter because your Place
bets are automatically off on the come-out roll for a new game.
12. A new game is about to start. Your Place bets are still considered off because
this is the come-out roll for a new game. The shooter rolls a 9; therefore, the point for this
game is 9. You feel the table is getting hot, so you take $30 in Odds on the point behind
the line. Since your Place bets were off on the come-out, you dont win your Place bet on
the 9 when the shooter rolled 9 as the new point. You still have a Place bet on the 9, so
the dealer asks, Sir, what would you like to do with your nine? You now already have
the 9 covered by your Pass Line with Odds bets since 9 is the new point, so you dont
want to cover it again with a Place bet. Most players either take the Place bet down or
move it to another number. In this example, since you feel the table is getting hot, you
decide to move it to a Place bet on the 4. Now, you have five numbers working for you:
Place bets on the 4, 5, 6, and 8; and the Pass Line with Odds bets on the point of 9.
13. The shooter rolls another 6. Woohoo! Your Place bet on the 6 wins again
(remember, your bet is up to $12). Just as its your turn to be paid, you tell the dealer,
Same bet, please. The dealer pays your winnings by placing $14 in chips in the apron
directly in front of you. Pick up your winnings. Your Place bet on the 6 is still up and
working.
14. The shooter rolls a 9. Winner, winner, lobster dinner! You high-five
everybody at that end of the table and the girl in the halter top gives you a big hug. The
shooter rolled his point, so the game ends. The dealer pays you $5 for your Flat Pass Line
bet and $45 for your Odds bet. While picking up all your chips, you shout, Yeah, baby, I
love these green chips! The dealer turns the puck OFF and puts it on the side of the
table.
15. A new game is about to start. You make a $5 Flat Pass Line bet. The table is
on fire, so you decide to keep your Place bets working on the come-out roll. Normally,
Place bets are considered off on the come-out, but you want them working because the
shooter is rolling lots of numbers. You tell the dealer, I want all my Place bets working
on the come-out. The dealer puts an ON button on one of your Place bets to indicate that
theyre all on and working on the come-out. The hot babe says, Sure you want to do
that? Were rooting for a seven on the come-out, so if you keep your Place bets working
and a seven shows, youll lose all your Place bets. You think, Shut up and play your
own game, but you politely say, The table is getting hot, so Im going for it.
16. The shooter rolls a 7 on the come-out. The game ends immediately. For your
Flat Pass Line bet, a 7 on the come-out is a winner, so the dealer puts a $5 chip next to
your Flat Pass Line bet. Pick up your $5 in winnings (leave your $5 Flat Pass Line bet
there for the next game). Since you kept your Place bets on and working on the come-out,
they all lose because a 7 showed. The dealer removes and keeps all your Place bets. The
girl looks at you with an I-told-you-so look.
17. A new game is about to start. The shooter rolls a 4 on the come-out; therefore,
the point for this game is 4. You feel the table is still hot, so you take $30 in Odds on the
point behind the line. You also drop $12 in chips in the Come box and tell the dealer,
Give me the six and eight, please. The dealer takes your chips and puts $6 on the 6 and
$6 on the 8. The shooter rolls and a die flies off the table. No roll! Uh, oh, this is bad
luck. Every time youve seen a die fly off the table, a 7 shows on the next roll. You tell
the dealer, My Place bets are off. The dealer puts an OFF button on top of one of your
Place bets to indicate theyre both off. You also decide to pick up your Odds bet because
you fear that dreaded 7 will show after a no-roll. (Remember, you can remove your Odds
bet at any time, but cant remove your Flat Pass Line bet.)
18. The shooter rolls a 12. Whew! It wasnt a 7. This must mean the table is still
hot, so you put back your $30 in Odds behind the line, and you tell the dealer, My Place
bets are back on. The dealer removes the OFF button from your Place bet indicating that
both your Place 6 and Place 8 bets are back on and working.
19. The shooter rolls a 4. The shooter made his point so the game ends. You
jump up and down shouting, Yeah, baby, thats what Im talking about! Give me some
more of those pretty green chips!
Buy Bet
All aspects of the Buy bet are the same as the Place bet except: 1) A Buy bet pays
off at true odds, 2) You have to pay a tax, or a vigorish, to get the true odds, and 3) A Buy
bet is positioned on the layout differently. Everything else about the Buy bet is the same
as the Place bet.
As were so painfully aware by now, the casino is in business to make money, so
theyre not going to give you true odds for nothing (except, of course, the free true Odds
bet that you can add to your Pass Line bet--theyre free because you dont have to pay a
vigorish). So, how does the casino make money if they pay off a Buy bet at true odds
(i.e., true odds means theres no built-in house advantage)? Ready to get screwed again?
They tax you! You believe that? A tax! You have to pay for the privilege of getting true
odds. This tax is called a vigorish or vig.
Remember John Winn from the Introduction (he invented the modern craps
layout)? His version of the game allowed gambling halls to offer more player-friendly
bets in return for a 5% charge. The worst the gambling halls could do was break even on
true odds bets, but they still made money because of the added 5% tax. The added charge
brought in so much money that they soon referred to it as giving vigor to their profits;
hence, the term vigorish. The vig today remains at 5%.
Buy bets on the 4 and 10 are always better than Placing the 4 and 10. Buy bets on
the 5 and 9 may be better than Placing the 5 and 9, depending on when you pay the vig.
However, Place bets on the 6 and 8 are always better than Buying the 6 and 8.
What makes the Buy bet on the 4 and 10 better than a Place bet on the 4 and 10?
Suppose you make a $10 Place bet on the 4 where the Place odds are 9:5, which means
you win $18 for your $10 bet ($10 divided by 5 = $2, multiplied by 9 = $18). Now,
instead of a Place bet, suppose you make a $10 Buy bet and pay a $1 vig for the privilege
of getting true odds, which are 2:1. For a $10 Buy bet on the 4, you win $20 but have to
pay the $1 vig, which results in a net payoff of $19. Comparing results of the two bets,
the winning Place bet nets you $18; whereas, the winning Buy bet nets you $19.
The Buy bet gets better as your bet amount increases. For example, suppose you
make a $25 Place bet on the 10, which means you win $45 for your $25 bet (Place odds
are 9:5). Now, suppose you make a $25 Buy bet and pay a $1 vig for the privilege of
getting true odds, which are 2:1. For a $25 Buy bet on the 10, you win $50 but have to
pay the $1 vig, which results in a net payoff of $49. Comparing results of the two bets,
the winning $25 Place bet nets you $45; whereas, the winning $25 Buy bet nets you $49.
Notice in the example for the $25 Buy bet that the vig is only $1. The 5% vig for
a $25 Buy bet actually works out to be $1.25, but the casino typically doesnt have chips
valued at less than $1, so the vig is rounded down. Generally, vigs with a fraction of
50 cents or less are rounded down, while vigs with a fraction greater than 50 cents are
rounded up. Therefore, for example, a $50 Buy bet has only a $2 vig even though 5%
of $50 is $2.50. But some casinos wont let you get away with too much of their profit.
Suppose you make two separate $50 Buy bets at the same time (e.g., you drop $100 in the
Come box and tell the dealer, Buy the four and ten for fifty dollars each.) Instead of
rounding down the vig for each bet and charging a total vig of $4 (i.e., $2 for each $50
bet), the casino may charge you the full $5 vig (i.e., $2.50 for each $50 Buy bet).
Most casinos dont charge the vig until after you win the bet. However, some
casinos require you to pay the vig up front at the time you make the bet. For example, for
a $10 Buy bet on the 4 with an up-front vig, you must put down $11 when you make the
bet (i.e., $10 for your bet and $1 for the vig). If the shooter rolls a 7, you lose $11.
However, to attract customers, most casinos require the vig after you win the bet. For
example, for a $10 Buy bet on the 4 with an after-win vig, you put down only the $10.
Then, if you win, the dealer pays you $19 (i.e., $20 for the win minus $1 for the vig).
Paying the vig after a win lowers the house advantage, which makes the Buy bet even
better.
My experience is that, if a player has a choice of casinos to play, then vigs are
generally paid after a win. If a casino is the only game in town, then vigs are generally
paid up front. The reason is simple--competition. If you have a choice of casinos, you
can walk out and go to the casino next door. However, if the casino is the only game in
town, they have you by the balls, so they can get away with charging the vig up front.
Their philosophy is, If you dont like it, dont play--but we know youll play even if you
dont like it.
Some casinos have minimums for their Buy bets. For example, you may not be
able to buy the 4 or 10 for less than $20 or $25; they wont allow a $10 Buy bet. I usually
put $10 in the Come box and say, Buy the four, please. If they dont allow it, the dealer
says, Sir, your Buy bet has to be at least twenty dollars. So, I usually tell him to Place it
for $10. If I later want to increase the Place bet to $20, I drop $10 in the Come box and
say, Bump up my four to twenty dollars and Buy it. (Note that I changed the bet from a
Place bet to a Buy bet to get the better odds and lower house advantage.)
If a dealer tells me they dont allow $10 Buy bets, I sometimes like being smart-
alecky by asking, Why not? Their responses are often interesting, and sometimes
downright lies. Its amazing how many times a dealer tries to B.S. you by saying,
Buying the four or ten doesnt get you anything unless you bet at least twenty-five
dollars, so its best to Place it if you only want to bet ten dollars. What kind of nonsense
is that? We proved earlier that Buying the 4 or 10 for as little as $10 with an after-win vig
is to the players advantage. When a dealer tries to pass off that kind of B.S., I
immediately dislike him, stop all casual chat with him, and stop tipping. If he says, Sir,
Im sorry, its a house rule, or Sir, I dont know, then I respect his honesty and
continue chatting with him about last nights football game.
To make a Buy bet, drop your chips in the Come box and tell the dealer the
number you want to buy. The dealer then moves your chips to the point box in a position
that corresponds to your table position (in a manner similar to Place bets) and puts a BUY
button on top. The button tells the boxman and camera that youre Buying the number
instead of Placing it. See Figure 8-10 for an illustration of Buy bet positions.
To help the inexperienced player, some dealers automatically Buy the bet instead
of Placing it when its to the players advantage. For example, suppose the guy next to
you makes a $25 Place bet on the 10. Being the observant player that you are, you notice
the dealer move the $25 chip into the 10 point box and put a BUY button on it. The guy
next to you doesnt have a clue that the dealer potentially made him an extra $4 if the bet
wins (i.e., a winning $25 Buy bet nets $49; whereas, a winning $25 Place bet nets
only $45).
As noted earlier, the Buy bet is best made on the 4 or 10. However, it can also be
advantageous for the 5 and 9 if the casino allows paying the vig after a win instead of up
front. For example, suppose you make a $50 Place bet on the 5 where the Place odds are
7:5, which means you win $70 for your $50 bet ($50 divided by 5 = $10, multiplied by 7
= $70). Now, instead of a Place bet, suppose you make a $50 Buy bet and pay a $2 vig
for the privilege of getting true odds, which are 3:2. For a $50 Buy bet on the 5, you win
$75 ($50 divided by 2 = $25, multiplied by 3 = $75), but you have to pay the $2 vig,
which results in a net payoff of $73. Comparing results of the two bets, the winning $50
Place bet nets you $70; whereas, the winning $50 Buy bet nets you $73. If the casino
requires an up-front vig, Placing the 5 or 9 is better than Buying them because the house
advantage is lower (i.e., 4.00% for Placing the 5 or 9 versus 4.76% for Buying them with
an up-front vig).
The Buy bet isnt smart for the 6 and 8. You should always Place the 6 and 8
instead of Buying them. Lets do the math. As we know, Place bets on the 6 or 8 must be
in multiples of $6 to get the full Place odds of 7:6; and Buy bets on the 6 or 8 must be in
multiples of $5 to get the full true odds. Therefore, suppose you make a $96 Place bet on
the 6 and win, which means you win $112 ($96 divided by 6 = $16, multiplied by 7 =
$112). Now, instead of a Place bet, suppose you make a $95 Buy bet and, when you win,
pay a $5 vig for the privilege of getting true odds. For a $95 Buy bet on the 6, you win
$114 ($95 divided by 5 = $19, multiplied by 6 = $114), but you have to pay the $5 vig,
which results in a net payoff of $109. Comparing results of the two bets, the winning $96
Place bet nets you $112; whereas, the winning $95 Buy bet nets you $109. So, for the 6
and 8, a Place bet is better than a Buy bet. As well learn in the next chapter, the house
advantage for Place bets on the 6 and 8 is lower than Buy bets on the 6 and 8, regardless
of whether you pay the vig up front or after a win.
Again, the Buy bet is the same as a Place bet, except for the payoff odds and the
vig. Therefore, you can make, remove, increase, or decrease Buy bets at any time. If you
Numbers in circles correspond to player-position numbers
Position #8
Dont
Come
Player
8 7 6 5 BUY BUY
Dont Pass Bar

x in Bar
1
4 5
2 3 4 BUY
Si 8 N 10
BUY
PASS LINE
Position #7
Buy bets go inside the point boxes
Player
Come
3 4 9 10 11
2 12
Position #6
FIELD B
I 8
Player
Dont Pass Bar
6G
PASS LINE r n #5
e
ay io
BUY
Enlarged = $50
BUY = $50 Buy bet with a BUY button on top
Figure 8-10. Locations of Buy Bets
Circles in the 4 point box show where Buy bets go in all point boxes for each
player position.
In this example, notice the Buy button on top of your chips to designate them as
Buy bets.
Notice how the Buy bet locations correspond to player positions. In this example,
the following Buy bets are in action on the layout:
Player # 1 has a Buy bet on the 10.
Player #3 has a Buy bet on the 5.
paid the vig up front and later decide to remove your bet, the vig is also returned to you.
Like Place bets, Buy bets are considered off on the come-out roll of a new game unless
you tell the dealer you want them on and working.
Lay Bet
The Lay bet is for the 7 against your chosen number (i.e., the 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, or 10)
and the payoff is according to true odds. Its the opposite of the Buy bet, much like the
Dont Pass is the opposite of the Pass line. For example, if you Lay the 4, you hope a 7
shows before the 4; whereas, if you Buy the 4, you hope a 4 shows before the 7.
Lets quickly review true odds. The Lay bet pays off according to true odds,
which are: 1:2 for the 4 and 10, 2:3 for the 5 and 9, and 5:6 for the 6 and 8. For example,
the payoff odds for Laying the 10 are 1:2, which means you have to bet more money than
you win. For every two dollars you bet, you win one dollar. Its like the Dont Pass
where you have the advantage over the house because there are six ways to make a 7 and
only three ways to make a 10. Therefore, you have to put up your fair share, which is
twice the amount you hope to win. So, if your $20 Lay bet on the 10 wins, you win $10.
The Lay bet has the same vig as the Buy bet, but its based on the win amount, not
the bet amount. For example, suppose you Lay the 4 for $100. The true payoff odds are
1:2, which means your winning $100 Lay bet pays $50. The vig is based on the $50
winnings, not the $100 bet. So, the vig is $2 ($50 x 5% = $2.50, which is rounded down
to $2), instead of $5 ($100 x 5% = $5).
Lay bets are often called No bets. For example, suppose you play for three
hours and not a single 5 shows. You decide youre in a weird, anomalous blip of the
distribution where the number 5 just isnt going to show no matter what the craps gods do.
You want to take advantage of that anomaly so you drop $75 in the Come box and tell the
dealer, Give me a No five, please. The dealer moves your chips to the 5 point box and
puts a LAY button on top. (Lay bets are positioned in the same locations as Dont Come
with Odds bets, as noted in Figure 8-8.) Sure enough, the 5 doesnt show and the shooter
rolls a 7-out. Your $75 Lay bet wins $50 (i.e., the true odds are 2:3, so $75 divided by 3 =
$25, multiplied by 2 = $50). You must also pay the 5% vig on your winnings. To make it
easier for himself, the dealer will likely give you two $25 chips for your winnings and say,
Drop me two dollars, please, rather than count out $48 in chips. In this case, you simply
drop two $1 chips in the Come box and then pick up your two $25 chips.
Unlike Buy bets, Lay bets are kept on and working on the come-out roll of a new
game. However, you can always turn them off and on whenever you want. Typically,
players leave their Lay bets on and working for the come-out roll because they have the
advantage over the house (i.e., there are always more ways to make a 7 than any of the
point numbers). Another reason--a silly reason, but a reason nonetheless--is because
everyone is typically rooting for a 7 on the come-out (most people play the Pass Line, so a
7 on the come-out is a winner for them). With all that positive mojo at the table, a 7 is
bound to show, so leave your Lay bets working for the come-out roll of a new game.
Seriously, you should leave your Lay bets working on the come-out not because of table
mojo, but because you have the advantage over the house.
Like Buy bets, you can make, remove, increase, or decrease Lay bets at any time.
Hardway Bets
A Hardway bet is a standing bet that you can make, remove, increase, or decrease
at any time. You bet that a hardway number will show as a pair before any other
combination of that number, and before a 7 shows. A Hardway bet can be made only on
the numbers 4, 6, 8, and 10.
For a Hardway bet, each roll can produce three possible outcomes: 1) The hardway
number is rolled and the bet wins, 2) The easyway number or a 7 is rolled and the bet
loses, 3) Any other number is rolled and the bet neither wins nor loses (i.e., it stands
until it wins or loses, or until you remove it).
Whats a hardway versus an easyway? As noted, Hardway bets are made on
the 4, 6, 8, and 10. Lets look at the 10. By now, you know without thinking that there
are three ways to make a 10. We know from Table 1-1 that the three two-dice
combinations for making a 10 are:
DIE #1 DIE #2 RESULT

6 4 10
4 6 10
5 5 10
Looking at the table above, which combination of numbers do you think is

considered the hardway for making a 10? Way to go! Youre right again! The 5-5
combination is considered the Hard 10. Therefore, your Hard 10 bet stands until a 5-5
is rolled (you win), a 7 is rolled (you lose), or an Easy 10 (i.e., 4-6 or 6-4) is rolled (you
lose). Now, lets quickly look at the 4, 6, and 8.
There are three ways to make a 4, and the dice combinations are:
DIE #1 DIE #2 RESULT WHATS IT CALLED?

1 3 4 Easy 4
3 1 4 Easy 4
2 2 4 Hard 4
The Hard 4 bet wins if a 2-2 shows before a 7, 1-3, or 3-1.

There are five ways to make a 6, and the dice combinations are:

1 5 6 Easy 6
5 1 6 Easy 6
2 4 6 Easy 6
4 2 6 Easy 6
3 3 6 Hard 6
The Hard 6 bet wins if a 3-3 shows before a 7, 1-5, 5-1, 2-4, or 4-2.
There are five ways to make an 8, and the dice combinations are:

2 6 8 Easy 8
6 2 8 Easy 8
3 5 8 Easy 8
5 3 8 Easy 8
4 4 8 Hard 8
The Hard 8 bet wins if a 4-4 shows before a 7, 2-6, 6-2, 3-5, or 5-3.
Although the 2 and 12 are even numbers and both are made by quasi-hardway
combinations (i.e., the 2 is made by 1-1, and the 12 is made by 6-6), theres no Hardway
bet for them because neither has an easyway combination.
The table minimum bet doesnt apply to Hardway bets. Instead, the minimum is
whatever the lowest-denomination chip is in play for that table, which is usually $1.
The payoff for the Hard 4 and Hard 10 is 7:1; whereas, the payoff for the Hard 6
and Hard 8 is 9:1. The Hard 6 and 8 each have four easyways to lose. The Hard 4 and 10
each have only two easyways to lose. Therefore, with more ways to lose, the Hard 6
and 8 have a higher payoff than the Hard 4 and 10.
Some casinos try to trick the inexperienced player into thinking they have higher
Hardway payoffs than their competition by offering odds written on the table layout as
8 for 1 and 10 for 1. At first glance, this does appear to be a bit better than 7:1
and 9:1. However, look at it closely and youll see that its 8 for 1, instead of 8 to 1.
8 for 1 means they pay you $8 but they keep your $1 bet. 7:1 means they pay you $7
and you keep your $1 bet. Therefore, 8 for 1 is the same as 7:1, and 10 for 1 is the
same as 9:1. If Im somewhere with lots of casinos such as Vegas, and unless its a $3
table with high maximum free odds (e.g., at least 10x), I turn around, walk out, and go to
the casino next door. It bugs me to see a casino try to trick players into thinking it offers
better odds than its competition. So, to hell with them, I go somewhere else.
You can call Hardway bets on or off at any time. This usually occurs after the
shooter makes a point. Players typically play the Pass Line, so after a game ends, they
make another Pass Line bet. They root for a 7 on the come-out roll, but although a 7 on
the come-out is a winner for the Pass Line, its a loser for the working Hardway bets.
Therefore, players tend to call their Hardways off for the come-out roll so they can root
for a 7 without worrying about losing their Hardways. The dealer then puts an OFF
button on their Hardways. After the shooter makes a point, players call their Hardways
back on and working. The dealer then removes the OFF button.
You must be aware of the casinos policy for whether Hardway bets are on or off
for the come-out roll. There doesnt seem to be consistency among casinos. Ask the
dealer, Are the Hardways automatically off? Or simply listen to the stickman before the
come-out roll, who says something like, Hardways work unless you call them off. If
you dont want a conflict in what to root for (i.e., rooting for a 7 on the come-out conflicts
with your working Hardways), then simply call your Hardways off on the come-out and
then call them back on after the shooter makes a point.
Hardways are located in the center of the table and typically controlled by the
stickman, so dont try to put down or pick up any of these bets yourself. When you have
the stickmans attention, gently toss your chips to an open area near the center of the table
and say, Hard four, please. Sometimes, the stickman catches your chips in mid-air.
Sometimes, he lets them fall to the table and then picks them up. When you gently toss
your chips, try not to hit other peoples chips on the table because they could fly
everywhere and then the game is delayed while the stickman figures out where they all go.
After a while, you become incredibly accurate with your toss. I can stand at the end of the
table and toss a $1 chip to land in whichever Hardway box I want to bet. Oddly, other
players are impressed with that worthless skill. The stickman then places your chips
inside the Hardway box in a position that corresponds to your table position (in a manner
similar to Place bets).
Lets look at a scenario to ensure you understand Hardway bets.
take $6 in Odds on the point behind the line.
2. The shooter rolls a 4. The number 4 doesnt matter, so the game continues.
3. Your gut tells you the Hard 8 is going to hit. When you get the stickmans
attention, you toss a $1 chip near the center of the table and say, Hard eight, please.
The stickman picks up your chip and places it the proper spot in the Hard 8 box.
4. The shooter rolls an 8 with the dice combination of 5-3. The stickman says,
Eight easy, easy eight, the Hard eight is down. You lose your Hard 8 bet because an
Easy 8 showed before the Hard 8. Your gut still says a Hard 8 is going to hit, so you toss
another $1 chip to the center of the table and say, Give me that Hard eight again, please.
The dealer moves your chip to the Hard 8 box.
6. The shooter rolls a 5. Winner, winner, chicken dinner! The shooter rolled
his point, so the game ends. The dealer pays you $5 for your Flat Pass Line bet and $9 for
your Odds bet. Pick up all your chips. The number 5 doesnt matter for your Hard 8 bet,
so it remains on the table.
7. A new game is about to start with a come-out roll. The stickman says, Same
hot shooter coming out. Hardways work unless you call them off. You make a $5 Flat
Pass Line bet, and then tell the stickman, My Hard eight is off. The stickman puts an
OFF button on top of your Hard 8 chip.
8. The shooter rolls a 7. The game ends immediately. For your Flat Pass Line
bet, a 7 on the come-out is a winner, so the dealer puts a $5 chip next to your Pass Line
bet. Pick up your $5 in winnings. For your Hard 8 bet, a 7 doesnt matter because you
called your Hard 8 off and not working. So, even though the shooter rolled a 7, you dont
lose your Hard 8 bet. For the come-out roll of the next new game, your Hard 8 is still off.
9. On the come-out roll for the next new game, the shooter rolls a 6; therefore, the
point for this game is 6. You take $5 in Odds on the point behind the line. Now that a
point is established, you want your Hard 8 working again, so you tell the stickman, Turn
my Hard eight back on, please. The stickman removes the OFF button from your Hard 8
chip.
10. The shooter rolls an 8 with the dice combination of 4-4. The stickman says,
Eight hard, eight the hard way. Woohoo! You knew that Hard 8 was going to hit.
Great call! The 8 doesnt matter for your Pass Line with Odds bets, but your Hard 8 bet
wins because of the 4-4 dice combination. After the dealer pays everyone elses Place
bets, the stickman points with his mop (i.e., stick) to your position at the table and tells the
dealer, Nine dollars. The dealer counts out $9 and puts it in the apron directly in front
of you. Pick up your winnings. Your $1 Hard 8 chip stays on the table and continues
working.
12. The shooter rolls a 7. Oh, rats! The shooter rolled a 7-out, so you lose your
Pass Line with Odds bets. The dealer picks up all your Pass Line with Odds chips.
Because a 7 showed before a Hard 8, your Hard 8 loses. The stickman picks up your Hard
8 chip.
Big 6 and Big 8 Bets

The Big 6 and Big 8 bets are identical to the Place 6 and Place 8 bets except for
their payoff and location on the table layout. Most casinos dont offer these bets because
most people dont play. (Most people dont play them because theyre bad bets. Why?
Well discuss good versus bad bets in a later chapter.)
If offered, these bets are in the self-service area, just above the Pass Line at the
corner where the Pass Line bends. You cant miss them because theyre labeled in big,
red letters Big 6 and Big 8. Unlike Placing the 6 or 8 where the dealer moves your
chips into the 6 or 8 point box, you make these bets yourself by placing your chips
directly into the Big 6 or Big 8 box.
The Big 6 or Big 8 is an even-money bet, or 1:1. You can bet any amount as long
as its within the table minimum and maximum.
One-Roll Bets
One-roll bets are different from the standing bets weve discussed so far in that
their outcome is determined by only one roll (i.e., they win or lose on one roll). If the
number you bet shows on that one roll, you win. If it doesnt, you lose. Because their
outcome is determined after one roll, their payoffs arent based on the number 7 but,
instead, on the total number of dice combinations (i.e., 36). You can make one-roll bets at
any time (before the come-out, after the come-out, or anytime in between).
The most common one-roll bets are: Field; Any Seven; Any Craps; C&E; Horn;
Whirl; Two, Three, Eleven, and Twelve; Hop; Over 7; and Under 7.
Field Bet
The Field bet is a one-roll bet that wins if a 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 11, or 12 shows on the
next roll. It loses if a 5, 6, 7, or 8 shows. Some (not many) casinos switch the 5 and 9,
making the 5 a winner and the 9 a loser. Since the 5 and 9 have the same numbers of
ways to make them (i.e., four ways), the odds for the Field bet dont change if the casino
switches the 5 and 9.
The Field is a self-service bet, which means you put down and pick up your chips
in the Field box without the dealers help. The box is located between the Dont Pass and
Come areas, and is clearly labeled Field. If you cant remember which numbers win
and lose, dont worry, theyre also labeled in the Field box in big, bold font.
The Field pays even money (1:1) if a 3, 4, 9, 10, or 11 shows. It pays double (2:1)
or triple (3:1) if a 2 or 12 shows, depending on the casino. Some casinos pay double on
both the 2 and 12. Some pay double on one number and triple on the other. And a rare
few pay triple on both the 2 and 12. Its easy to know the casinos payoffs because the 2
and 12 are circled on the table layout and have either Pays Double or Pays Triple
written above the number.
Any Seven Bet
Any Seven (sometimes called Big Red) is a one-roll bet that wins if a 7 shows
and loses if any other number shows.
The minimum bet amount is the value of the lowest-denomination chip in play at
the table, usually $1. The payoff is 4:1, so you can bet any amount to get the full payoff
odds.
The Any Seven box is located in the center of the table and typically controlled by
the stickman, so keep your hands off and dont try to put down or pick up this bet
yourself. When you have the stickmans attention, gently toss your chip to an open area
near the center of the table and say, Any Seven, please. Remember, aim for an empty
spot so when your chip lands on the table, it doesnt knock other peoples chips all over
the place.
Any Craps Bet
The Any Craps bet is a one-roll bet that wins if a craps (i.e., 2, 3, or 12) shows on
the next roll, and loses if any other number shows. The minimum bet amount is the value
of the lowest-denomination chip in play, usually $1. The payoff is 7:1, so you can bet any
amount to get the full payoff odds.
The Any Craps box is located in the center of the table and typically controlled by
the stickman, so keep your hands off. When you have the stickmans attention, gently
toss your chips to an open area near the center of the table and say, Any Craps, please.
Aim for an empty spot so your chip doesnt mess up other chips on the table.
Depending on the casino, the layout may have a box in the proposition area (i.e.,
center of the table) labeled Any Craps, or 16 small circles next to the proposition area,
each containing the letter C, or both. The dealer places your Any Craps bet either in the
box or in one of the little C circles. You think, Why are there 16 little Any Craps
circles but only one Any Craps box? Good question, but like everything else in craps,
the answer is easy. The Any Craps box is big enough to hold all bets if everyone at the
table makes the bet at the same time, but the little C circles are only big enough to hold
one bet. Eight players can play on each side of the table. So, there are eight circles for
eight players on each side of the table. If the casinos layout uses little circles instead of
an Any Craps box, the dealer places your Any Craps bet in the little circle that
corresponds to your table position.
The Any Craps bet is sometimes called Crap Check when its used to hedge the
Flat Pass Line bet. For example, if a player makes a Flat $10 Pass Line bet, he might toss
in a $1 chip for a Crap Check to protect the Pass Line bet on the come-out roll. On the
come-out, if the shooter rolls a craps, the player loses his $10 Flat Pass Line bet, but
wins $7 for his Crap Check.
3-Way Craps Bet
3-Way Craps is like Any Craps in that its a one-roll bet that wins if a 2, 3, or 12
appears and loses with any other number. However, its actually three separate one-roll
bets disguised as one: a bet on the 2, a bet on the 3, and a bet on the 12. Therefore, your
3-Way Craps bet amount should be divisible by three. For example, if you make a $6
3-Way Craps bet, the dealer puts $2 on the 2, $2 on the 3, and $2 on the 12. The
minimum bet amount for each of the three numbers (i.e., 2, 3, and 12) is the value of the
lowest-denomination chip in play at the table, usually $1. So, since your bet amount
should be divisible by three, the smallest 3-Way Craps bet you can make is $3.
The 3-Way Craps bet is controlled by the stickman, so keep your hands off. The 2,
3, and 12 boxes are clearly marked in the proposition area. When you have the stickmans
attention, gently toss your chips to an open area near the center of the table and say,
Three-way Craps, please. Remember, aim for an empty spot on the table so your chips
dont mess up other chips on the table.
If a 2 shows, the payoff is 30:1; and your 3 and 12 lose. If a 12 shows, the payoff
is 30:1; and your 2 and 3 lose. If a 3 shows, the payoff is 15:1; and your 2 and 12 lose.
Note that there are two ways to make a 3 (i.e., 1-2 and 2-1) and only one make to make
a 2 (i.e., 1-1) or 12 (i.e., 6-6). Therefore, the payoff for the 3 is half the payoff for the 2
or 12.
C&E Bet
C&E (Craps and Eleven) is a one-roll bet combining Any Craps with the
number 11. On the layout, each little C circle has a little E circle adjacent to it (E
stands for Eleven). Since the dealer controls the C&E bet (keep your hands off), he puts
half your chips in the Any Craps circle (the C circle) and half in the Eleven circle (the
E circle).
If a 2, 3, or 12 shows on the next roll, the payoff is 7:1; and your 11 loses. If an 11
shows, the payoff is 15:1; and your Any Craps loses.
If you make a C&E bet that cant be divided into two whole numbers, the dealer
straddles the C and E circles with your chips (see Figure 8-11). Be careful making
C&E bets that dont result in whole numbers after being split. If you win and the resulting
payoff includes a fraction of a dollar, the casino cant pay you that fraction, so they keep it
for themselves.
An example of where a fractional bet results in a whole number payoff is the $5
C&E. The dealer cant split your $5 chip into whole-dollar halves ($5 divided by 2 =
$2.50; the casino doesnt have 50-cent chips), so he straddles the C and E circles with
your $5 chip. If an 11 shows on the next roll, the payoff is 15:1 so you win $37.50 (i.e.,
15 x $2.50 = $37.50), and you lose $2.50 for the Any Craps portion of your C&E bet;
therefore, your net win is $35, which is a whole number that the dealer can pay in full. If
a 2, 3, or 12 shows (i.e., Any Craps), the payoff is 7:1 so you win $17.50 (i.e., 7 x $2.50 =
$17.50), and you lose $2.50 for the Eleven portion of your C&E bet; therefore, your net
win is $15, which is a whole number.
C&E bets that dont result in whole numbers after being split can be confusing, so
its best to simply toss the dealer an even-numbered amount of chips to avoid dealing with
fractions of dollars.
Horn Bet
The Horn bet is a one-roll bet combining the numbers 2, 3, 11, and 12. Yes, it
sounds like a C&E bet, but theres a subtle difference. The Horn bet is actually four
separate bets on the 2, 3, 11, and 12; therefore, your bet amount should be divisible by
four.
Like the 3-Way Craps bet, when you win a Horn bet, you win on the number that
shows and lose the other three bets. If a 2 shows, the payoff is 30:1; and your 3, 11,
and 12 lose. If a 12 shows, the payoff is 30:1; and your 2, 3, and 11 lose. If a 3 shows,
the payoff is 15:1; and your 2, 11, and 12 lose. If an 11 slows, the payoff is 15:1; and
your 2, 3, and 12 lose.
The boxes for the 2, 3, 11, and 12 are clearly marked in the proposition area.
Since the dealer controls the Horn bet, he puts one fourth of your chips in each of the 2, 3,
11, and 12 boxes. (Some layouts include a box for the Horn bet.)
Be careful making Horn bets that dont result in whole numbers after being split
(i.e., when the dealer divides your chips into four equal amounts). If you win and the
resulting payoff includes a fraction of a dollar, the casino cant pay you that fraction, so
they keep it for themselves. Many players are lazy and dont like counting out four $1
chips, which are also hard to toss to the middle of table without making a mess. Theyd
rather toss a single $5 chip, and say something like, Horn high twelve. The dealer
makes four non-fractional bets and puts the leftovers on the number called. For example,
for a $5 Horn High 12, the dealer changes the $5 chip into five $1 chips, and then puts
$1 on each of the 2, 3, 11, and 12. He then adds the remaining $1 to the 12; thereby,
making the 12 a $2 bet (i.e., higher than the other three bets).
HARDWAYS
E E
C C
E 9 to 1 9 to 1 E
C C
E C C $5 E
7 to 1 7 to 1
E C C E
ONE ROLL BETS
E C 4 to 1 ANY SEVEN 4 to 1 C E
E C C E
Side Section Layout

Side Section Layout
30 to 1 30 to 1
C HORN C
E E
C 15 to 1 15 to 1 C
E 7 to 1
E
ANY CRAPS 7 to 1
Your $5 C&E Bet
Figure 8-11. Straddling the C&E Bet
In this example, you toss a $5 chip to the stickman and say, C&E, please. The
dealer cant divide your $5 chip into two equal whole-number amounts, so he
straddles the C and E circles with your chip (i.e., the C and E circles that
correspond to your position at the table). Straddling indicates that half your bet is
applied to the C (Any Craps) and half your bet is applied to the E (Eleven).
Lets see if youre paying attention. Suppose the guy next to you tosses two $5
chips to the stickman and shouts, Horn high three. What bets does the player want and
for how much? Wow, incredible! Youre amazing! See, I told you this is easy. The
dealer puts $2 on the 2, 3, 11, and 12; then, he adds the remaining $2 to the 3. Therefore,
the 2, 11, and 12 are $2 bets; and the 3 is a $4 bet.
Whirl Bet
The Whirl bet is sometimes called a World bet. The Whirl bet is a one-roll bet
combining the Horn bet with the Any Seven. The Whirl bet is actually five separate bets
on the 2, 3, 11, 12, and 7; therefore, your bet amount should be divisible by five.
The Whirl bet wins if a 2, 3, 11, 12, or 7 shows, and loses if any other number
shows. If a 2 shows, the payoff is 30:1; and your 3, 11, 12, and 7 lose. If a 12 shows, the
payoff is 30:1; and your 2, 3, 11, and 7 lose. If a 3 shows, the payoff is 15:1; and your 2,
11, 12, and 7 lose. If an 11 shows, the payoff is 15:1; and your 2, 3, 12, and 7 lose. If a 7
shows, the payoff is 4:1; and your 2, 3, 11, and 12 lose.
Depending on the layout, the Whirl bet may or may not have its own box in the
center of the table. For layouts that dont, the dealer typically divides your chips into five
equal amounts and places them in the 2, 3, 11, 12, and Any Seven boxes.
Be careful making Whirl bets that dont result in whole numbers after dividing
your total bet by 5. If you win and the resulting payoff includes a fraction of a dollar, the
casino cant pay you that fraction, so they keep it for themselves. Unless youre good at
math and can calculate in your head whether fractional bets will result in a whole-number
payoff, its best to simply toss the dealer an amount divisible by five to avoid the potential
for dealing with cents.
Two, Three, Eleven, and Twelve Bets
These are individual one-roll bets on each individual number. Note that, if you
make all four of these bets at the same time, its called a Horn bet. The layout has a box
in the center section for each of the four numbers. You can bet on one of these numbers
or any combination of them. For example, suppose the player next to you tosses a $5 chip
to the center of the table and shouts, Gimme snake eyes and boxcars, high on the
boxcars. What bets, and for how much, does he want? Wow! I thought Id trick you
with that question, but you answered it correctly! Youre right; he wants $2 on the 2 and
$3 on the 12. If anything other than 2 or 12 shows on the next roll, both bets lose.
The 2 is often called snake eyes. The 3 is called ace deuce. The 12 is called
boxcars. The 11 is called yo or yo-leven.
When an 11 shows, the stickman typically calls yo (or occasionally yo-leven)
to differentiate it from a seven. Since eleven sounds like seven, the stickman calls
yo to avoid confusion among the players.
Hop Bets
The Hop bet is a one-roll bet on a specific dice combination, such as 6-2, 5-1, 3-4,
5-5, etc. For example, if you toss a $1 chip to the center of the table and politely say,
Hopping two-four, please, the next roll must show a 2-4 or 4-2 combination to win. If
any other combination shows, you lose. Hop bets are hardly ever shown on the layout and
few players make them because of the high house advantage or because they simply dont
know they exist.
Most Hop bets have two ways to win, such as Hop 3-6, which wins if the resulting
dice combination is 6-3 or 3-6. Others have only one way to win, such as 4-4. The payoff
for Hop bets with two ways to win is 15:1. The payoff for Hop bets with only one way to
win is 30:1.
The Hopping 2-2, 3-3, 4-4, and 5-5 are called Hopping Hardways. The
difference between a Hopping Hardway and a regular Hardway--other than the payoff--is
that the Hopping Hardway is a one-roll bet and either wins or loses on the next roll;
whereas, the regular Hardway is a standing bet that doesnt lose until either an Easyway
or 7 shows.
Suppose you toss $1 to the center of the table and say, Hop the twelve, please.
What do you think the dealer does with your chip? I dont believe it! I cant get any trick
questions past you! The dealer puts your chip in the 12 box. The 12 is a one-roll bet that
has its own box in the center of the table. If you find a layout that includes boxes for Hop
bets, you wont see boxes for a Hop 2, Hop 3, Hop 11, and Hop 12 because those numbers
already have their own separate boxes. Therefore, the 2, 3, 11, and 12 arent called Hop
bets. If you want a one-roll bet on the 2, 3, 11, or 12, simply toss your chip(s) to the
center of the table and say, for example, Give me snake eyes, please.
Over 7 and Under 7 Bets
The Over 7 and Under 7 bets are uncommon one-roll bets that you probably wont
see unless you play in a lot of different casinos. The Over 7 bet wins if an 8, 9, 10, 11, or
12 shows on the next roll; and loses if any other number shows, including 7. The Under 7
bet wins if a 6, 5, 4, 3, or 2 shows on the next roll; and loses if any other number shows,
including 7. The payoff for both bets is 1:1, or even money.
Chapter 9: Good Bet or Bad Bet? 94
Chapter 9
Good Bet or Bad Bet?
Sadly, in terms of affecting a craps decision, theres no such thing as a skilled

player. However, there are, indeed, knowledgeable and ignorant players. Although you
cant affect craps decisions, your amount of knowledge can play a big factor in whether
you lose a lot quickly or lose a little slowly, or maybe even occasionally win. Lets not
kid ourselves. As we know, casinos are in business to make money, not gamble. How do
you think they pay for those multi-billion dollar mega-resorts? The player is the gambler,
not the casino. The casino has their built-in house advantage, so over time, they know
theyll rake in the money.
Knowing the house advantage for each craps bet does more for your bankroll and
playing enjoyment than anything else. Based on house advantages, some bets are
considered good (relatively low house advantage) and others are considered bad
(relatively high house advantage). Playing the good and avoiding the bad is a prerequisite
to the secret of craps. Remember, More knowledge is more money.
You must accept the fact that craps is a negative expectation game because of the
built-in house advantage. Negative expectation means the game will result in you
eventually losing all of your money. You may experience shorts periods of winning, but
over time, youre guaranteed to lose. Lets review what we learned in Chapter 1 about
house advantage by using the familiar example of a coin flip.
For each flip, you have a 50/50 chance of the coin showing heads and a 50/50
chance of showing tails. A 50/50 payoff means you expect true 1:1 odds (i.e., if you bet
$1 and win, you win $1). As we know, the casino doesnt offer true odds on any craps bet
except free Odds on the point. The casino is in business to make money so it has to have
an edge to make a profit. It gets its edge by offering odds that are less than true
(sometimes called casino odds). In the coin-flip example, for each $1 bet that you lose,
you lose $1. However, for each $1 bet that you win, the house doesnt pay you $1.
Instead, it may pay only $0.96. Its easy to see that youre playing a negative expectation
game and, over time, youll go broke.
How long will it take you to go broke playing craps? That depends on whether
you make bets with high or low house advantages. Of course, your bet amount is a big
factor, but lets focus on good versus bad bets. For example, if you make only Big 6 bets
that have a 9% house advantage, you can expect to lose an average of $0.90 for every $10
bet. If you make only Pass Line bets that have a 1.4% house advantage, you can expect to
lose an average of about $0.14 for every $10 bet. Of the two, which do you think is the
good bet and bad bet in terms of the player? I dont know about you, but Id rather
lose an average of only 14 cents per bet than an average of 90 cents per bet. Wouldnt
you? Thats why its so important to play good bets and avoid bad ones. Obviously, if
you consistently play bad bets (relatively high house advantages), youll go broke a lot
faster than if you play good ones (relatively low house advantages).
How is house advantage calculated? You think, Good grief, do I have to do a
bunch of math to figure all this stuff out? Relax. Lets just do one example so you have
the basic understanding. After the example, I provide a table that contains house
advantages for all bets.
Lets consider the basic Pass Line bet. As we know, it pays even money when you
win, but there are more ways to lose than win so the house is screwing us by giving us
casino odds instead of true odds. Lets do the math and calculate the house advantage.
You probably dont like dealing with fractions as much as I, so lets first determine
how many rolls we need to achieve winners and losers using whole numbers (i.e., no
fractions). Remember, the Pass Line bet wins on the come-out with a 7 or 11, and loses
on the come-out with a 2, 3, or 12. If a point is established, the Pass Line bet wins if the
shooter makes the point, and loses if a 7 shows. To get whole-number results so we dont
have to deal with fractions in Table 9-1, it takes 55 rounds of 36 rolls, or 1,980 rolls (55 x
36 = 1,980). The following table shows the results of 1,980 rolls for a perfect distribution.
Table 9-1. Pass Line Winners and Losers after 1,980 Rolls
NUMBER # of TIMES ROLLED # of WINNING # of LOSING
ROLLED (OUT OF 1980 ROLLS) ROLLS ROLLS
7 330 330 0
11 110 110 0
2,3,12 220 0 220
4 165 55 110
5 220 88 132
6 275 125 150
8 275 125 150
9 220 88 132
10 165 55 110
TOTAL 1980 976 1004
For a basic understanding, lets look at how we derive the numbers in the above
table.
Row #1 (the number 7): This row is for a 7 showing on the come-out roll. There are six
ways out of 36 possible dice combinations to make a 7; therefore, 6 / 36 = 0.1666.
0.1666 x 1980 = 330. Therefore, a winning 7 on the come-out shows 330 times out of
1,980 rolls.
Row #2 (the number 11): This row is for an 11 showing on the come-out roll. There are
two ways to make an 11; therefore, 2 / 36 = 0.0555 x 1980 = 110. Therefore, a
winning 11 on the come-out shows 110 times out of 1,980 rolls.
Row #3 (the numbers 2, 3, and 12): This row is for a craps showing on the come-out roll.
There are four ways to make a 2, 3, or 12; therefore, 4 / 36 = 0.1111 x 1980 = 220.
Therefore, a losing craps on the come-out shows 220 times out of 1,980 rolls.
Row #4 (the number 4): This row is for winning and losing a Pass Line bet when the point
is 4. There are three ways to make a 4; therefore, 3 / 36 = 0.0833 x 1980 = 165. When
the point is 4, the true odds indicate theres a 2:1 chance the shooter will 7-out. In other
words, for every three rolls when the point is 4, the shooter will 7-out twice and hit the
point once. Therefore, 165 / 3 = 55. Considering the 2:1 true odds when the point is 4,
the shooter wins by hitting the point 55 times (i.e., 1 x 55 = 55), and loses with a 7-out
110 times (i.e., 2 x 55 = 110). 55 + 110 = 165.
is 5. There are four ways to make a 5; therefore, 4 / 36 = 0.1111 x 1980 = 220. When the
point is 5, the true odds indicate theres a 3:2 chance the shooter will 7-out. In other
words, for every five rolls when the point is 5, the shooter will 7-out three times and hit
the point twice. Therefore, 220 / 5 = 44. Considering the 3:2 true odds when the point
is 5, the shooter wins by hitting the point 88 times (2 x 44 = 88), and loses with a 7-out
132 times (i.e., 3 x 44 = 132). 88 + 132 = 220.
is 6. There are five ways to make a 6; therefore, 5 / 36 = 0.1388 x 1980 = 275. When the
point is 6, the true odds indicate theres a 6:5 chance the shooter will 7-out. In other
words, for every eleven rolls when the point is 6, the shooter will 7-out six times and hit
the point five times. Therefore, 275 / 11 = 25. Considering the 6:5 true odds, when the
point is 6, the shooter wins by hitting the point 125 times (5 x 25 = 125), and loses with a
7-out 150 times (i.e., 6 x 25 = 150). 125 + 150 = 275.
Rows 7, 8, and 9 (for the numbers 8, 9, and 10): These rows are identical to their paired
numbers (i.e., from Chapter 1, we know that 8 pairs with 6, 9 pairs with 5, and 10 pairs
with 4).
Therefore, from the table above, for an even-money Pass Line bet after 1,980 rolls
in a perfect distribution, the player wins 976 times while the house wins 1,004 times
(976 + 1,004 = 1,980). However, the Pass Line is an even-money bet and for a true even-
money bet, we expect to win and lose an equal number of times (i.e., 990 wins and 990
losses; 990 + 990 = 1,980). Since the house has 28 more ways to win than the player (i.e.,
from the table above, 1004 - 976 = 28), we calculate the house advantage as 28 / 1980 =
0.01414, which is 1.4% expressed as a percentage. Therefore, the even-money Pass Line
bet has a 1.4% house advantage over the player because the house pays only even-money
casino odds instead of true odds.
The house advantage is calculated similarly for all other bets. Results are
summarized in Table 9-2, sorted from lowest-to-highest house advantage. Good means
the bet is safe or a bet that you want to make because of the relatively low house
advantage. Maybe means think twice about making the bet. Bad means you
shouldnt make the bet because of the relatively high house advantage. In the table below,
all house advantages are rounded to two decimal places, and HA stands for House
Advantage.
Table 9-2. House Advantage for All Craps Bets

TRUE CASINO HA
BET GOOD/BAD
ODDS ODDS (%)
Dont Pass, Dont Come
1.03:1 1:1 0.69 Good
(with single Odds)
Pass Line, Come
1.03:1 1:1 0.85 Good
(with single Odds)
Dont Pass, Dont
1.03:1 1:1 1.40 Good
Come
Pass Line, Come 1.03:1 1:1 1.41 Good
Place 6 or 8 6:5 7:6 1.52 Good
Buy 4 or 10
2:1 2:1 1.64 Good
(pay vig on win)
Lay 4 or 10
1:2 1:2 1.64 Good
(pay vig on win)
Buy 5 or 9
3:2 3:2 1.96 Good
(pay vig on win)
Lay 5 or 9
2:3 2:3 1.96 Good
(pay vig on win)
Buy 6 or 8
6:5 6:5 2.22 Maybe
(pay vig on win)
Lay 6 or 8
5:6 5:6 2.22 Maybe
(pay vig on win)
Lay 4 or 10
1:2 1:2 2.44 Maybe
(pay vig up front)
1:1
Field (triple for 12 or 2) 20:19 2:1 for 2 2.78 Maybe
3:1 for 12
Lay 5 or 9
2:3 2:3 3.23 Maybe
(pay vig up front)
Lay 6 or 8
5:6 5:6 4.00 Maybe
(pay vig up front)
Place 5 or 9 3:2 7:5 4.00 Maybe
TRUE CASINO HA
BET GOOD/BAD
ODDS ODDS (%)
Buy 4 or 10
2:1 2:1 4.76 Bad
(pay vig up front)
Buy 5 or 9
3:2 3:2 4.76 Bad
(pay vig up front)
Buy 6 or 8
6:5 6:5 4.76 Bad
(pay vig up front)
1:1
Field (double for 2 and 12) 10:9 2:1 for 2 5.55 Bad
and 12
Place 4 or 10 2:1 9:5 6.67 Bad
Big 6 or Big 8 6:5 1:1 9.09 Bad
Hard 6 or Hard 8 10:1 9:1 9.09 Bad
Any Craps 8:1 7:1 11:10 Bad
3 or 11 17:1 15:1 11.10 Bad
C&E 15:3 13:3 11.10 Bad
Hard 4 or Hard 10 8:1 7:1 11.10 Bad
Hop two ways 17:1 15:1 11.10 Bad
Horn 20:4 17:4 12.50 Bad
Whirl (World) 10:5 8:5 13.33 Bad
2 or 12 35:1 30:1 13.89 Bad
Hop one way 35:1 30:1 13.89 Bad
Any 7 5:1 4:1 16.67 Bad
Over 7 or Under 7 21:15 1:1 16.67 Bad
Its important to remember that whether a bet is deemed good or bad is based
on many rolls over time. In the relatively short blip of time that you stand at the craps
table on any particular day, you may experience a hiccup in the normal distribution where
even the worst bets hit one right after the other. For example, suppose you walk up to the
table and play your usual conservative game of only Pass Line with Odds. The table is
cold as ice at that specific moment and 10 shooters in a row 7-out. The whole time youre
losing on the Pass Line, the drunken idiot next to you keeps hitting his $5 Field bet. In
fact, he hits it 20 times in a row, of which eight hits were the 2 or 12 that paid double!
You think, Man, this guy is a genius. I need to start playing the Field. You surrender to
your emotion and drop a $5 chip in the Field. Sure enough, as soon as you bet it, the next
roll is a 7 and the Field loses.
That guy who continually plays the Field has certainly paid, or will pay, a big price
for his short-lived wins. Too bad his temporary winning streak occurred while you were
at the table to see it. Too bad you allowed his dumb luck to entice you into joining the
Dark Side. You can be sure that time is against him and hell most certainly lose. Maybe
not today or tomorrow, but certainly over the next few days. Resist the Dark Side! Stick
to what you know is right. Otherwise, youll soon be walking the Vegas Strip with your
empty pockets turned inside out, looking for your wife to beg her for more money. Give
yourself the best chance of winning by making bets with the lowest house advantage.
Pass Line with Odds
To reiterate, any bet that consistently hits at any specific moment can be
considered the best bet at that particular time. However, the Pass Line with Odds (or
Dont Pass with Odds) is the best bet available over time, in terms of house advantage.
Note in the table above that the Flat Pass Line bet has a 1.41% house advantage
while the Pass Line with Single Odds has a much lower 0.85% house advantage (thats
less than 1%). I know what youre thinking! Im impressed that you observed this and
wondered about it. You think, Suppose you and I are at the table together. If I make
only Flat Pass Line bets with no Odds, and you make the same Flat Pass Line bets but
with single Odds, how can the house advantage for your bets be lower than my bets? It
doesnt make sense because the Odds bet is supposed to have neither a house nor player
advantage over time. Therefore, wont we be losing the same amount of money over time
on the Flat bet?
Technically, yes. Youre starting to think like a craps player. Thats good! Over
time and on average, both of us will lose 1.4 cents for each dollar we bet on the Flat Pass
Line because of the built-in 1.41% house advantage. However, with my Single Odds bet
in addition to my Flat bet, Im betting more money without taking any additional risk.
Remember, over time and on average, the Odds bet has neither a house nor player
advantage. Therefore, although I have more money in play than you, Im taking the same
amount of risk as you. That means, by taking Odds, I lose a smaller percentage of my
bankroll than you.
The larger the Odds bet, the smaller the house advantage becomes. You can never
eliminate the house advantage because of the Flat bet (you cant make an Odds bet
without first making a Flat bet), but you can chip away at it. Therefore, if youre fortunate
enough to have a big bankroll, you should always make the minimum Flat Pass Line bet
allowed (or Flat Dont Pass) with the maximum Odds allowed. For example, suppose
youre at a $5 table that allows 100x Odds. If you have a hefty bankroll, you should
bet $5 on the Pass Line and take $500 in Odds. Or, if you prefer, bet $5 on the Dont Pass
and lay $1,000 in Odds. But who has that kind of money? Certainly not me and probably
not you. Then what?
If you dont have that kind of bankroll (because your wife, like mine, wont give
you more than $100 for gambling every two or three hours), then you should search out
the lowest table minimum and make at least double Odds bets (i.e., 2x Odds).
If youre on the Vegas Strip, take 20 minutes to visit several casinos in the
immediate area and play at the one that offers the lowest table minimum and highest Odds
allowed. Better yet, email or call the casinos before you even get to Vegas so you know
exactly where to go as soon as you dump your suitcase in the room. If you play at my
favorite Vegas Strip casino that still has $3 tables with 100x Odds, consider dropping $3
on the Pass Line with $10 in Odds if the point is 4, 5, 9, or 10; or $12 in Odds if the point
is 6 or 8. This approach allows you to minimize your Flat bet and maximize your Odds
bet, while keeping your limited bankroll under control. (Reminder: This approach is only
the prerequisite to playing craps the right way. The secret is still yet to come!)
Field
You must know the Fields house advantages before making this bet. The house
edge is different depending on whether the 2 and 12 pay double, or one of them pays
triple, or both pay triple.
Suppose you play at a casino that offers 2:1 (double) for both the 2 and 12, which
is what youll find in most casinos. In this case, the Field is a lousy bet. Regardless of
what other players at the table tell you, and regardless of what you read in online articles,
and regardless of anything you hear or read from any other source, the Field bet with 2:1
odds for the 2 and 12 is a bad bet. Say it out loud, The Field that pays double for the 2
and 12 is a lousy bet. In this case, the Field has a big 5.5% house advantage. But most
people dont realize that and, time after time, you see them plopping their chips down on
the Field. What makes the Field so attractive to those brain-dead robots that keep playing
it?
The Field is easy to see on the layout, the letters and numbers are big and pretty,
its easy to drop your money (you dont have to reach far), and you can do it yourself
without bothering the dealer--it just looks and feels like a nice bet. However, the beautiful
thing about this bet (from the casinos viewpoint) is that it gives the illusion that there are
more ways to win than lose.
The Field wins if a 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 11, or 12 shows, which means there are seven
different numbers that can win. The field loses if a 5, 6, 7, or 8 shows, which means there
are only four different numbers that can lose. Certainly, seven winning numbers
compared to only four losing numbers is a great deal for the player. Right? Wrong!
Thats entirely the wrong way to view it. You must consider the number of ways to make
each of those numbers, not the numbers themselves. Lets do the math.
For the winning numbers:
WAYS TO CUMULATIVE
NUMBER
MAKE IT WAYS TO WIN
2 1 1
3 2 3
4 3 6
9 4 10
10 3 13
11 2 15
12 1 16
Total ways to win 16
As you can see, there are 16 ways to win a Field bet.

For the losing numbers:
WAYS TO CUMULATIVE
NUMBER
MAKE IT WAYS TO LOSE
5 4 4
6 5 9
7 6 15
8 5 20
Total ways to lose 20
As you can see, there are 20 ways to lose a Field bet.

Therefore, with 36 possible combinations for a two-dice roll, the Field bet has 16
ways to win and 20 ways to lose (in terms of the player). Because all the numbers
except 2 and 12 pay even money (i.e., 1:1), you basically get even money for a bet that
has more ways for you to lose than win. Even with the 2 and 12 paying double, the house
edge is still about 5.5%.
If you can find a table that pays double for the 2 and triple for the 12, then the
house edge is reduced to only about 2.8%. This configuration makes the Field bet more
attractive to the player. Note that it doesnt matter which number pays triple (i.e., the 2
or 12) because both only have one way to make them (i.e., the odds dont change
regardless of whether the casino offers triple for the 2 or the 12).
If youre really lucky to find a table that offers triple for both the 2 and 12, then the
Field is a dream come true. When the Field pays triple for both the 2 and 12, the bet
becomes a zero expectation bet, which means the house has no advantage. Thats right,
no house advantage. But dont get too excited. As we know, the house isnt in business
to gamble; its in business to make money. So, you only find a Field that pays triple for
both the 2 and 12 in special cases where the casino is trying to attract new customers, such
as running a short-lived promotion. Most casinos never offer it for any reason.
Remember, theyre in business to make money, not gamble. Youre the gambler, not the
casino.
When you see the Field offering double for the 2 and 12, avoid it. No matter how
much money the guy next to you is winning on the Field, dont do it. No matter how
many times the guy says, Man, you need to get on that Field, dont do it. If you a
develop a habit for playing the Field where the 2 and 12 pay double, youre going to lose
big time over the long haul. Dont allow yourself the opportunity to develop a habit of
betting the Field. Just dont do it.
Big 6 and Big 8
The Big 6 or Big 8 is an even-money bet, or 1:1. Therefore, you can bet any
amount as long as its at least the table minimum. Based on what we now know about
true odds and casino odds, is this a good bet? Youre right again! Its not a good bet--
most of the time. In fact, most of the time, its a stupid bet and shows that the player
doesnt have a clue what hes doing. Lets do the math.
Suppose you make a $6 bet on the Big 6. Like a Place bet, you hope a 6 shows
before a 7. We know there are more ways to make a 7 and lose than ways to make a 6 and
win, so we expect compensation (i.e., odds) for taking that added risk. If we expect odds
for a bet on the 6 against the 7, why would we accept even money when we dont have to?
We shouldnt. Suppose your $6 Big 6 bet wins. You win $6 because its an even-money
bet. However, if you Place the 6 for $6 and win, you win $7 (7:6 odds). Its clear that,
for $6 action on the 6, its better to win $7 on a Place bet than only $6 on a Big 6 bet.
Now, suppose you make an $18 Big 6 bet and win. You win $18 (even money).
However, if you Place the 6 for $18, you win $21 (7:6 odds). Obviously, as your Big 6/8
bet amount increases, the winning amount you give up by making Big 6/8 bets instead of
Place bets also increases. Therefore, the Big 6/8 are generally stupid bets and you should
avoid them--most of the time.
Suppose you get off work and have an hour to kill, so you stop at your favorite
local casino to play some craps and drink a couple free beers (players generally drink for
free while gambling). You walk up to a $3 table, drop $20, and say, All ones, please.
For a $3 table, the minimum Big 6/8 bet is only $3. If you have a limited bankroll (as in
this example), although you must accept a whopping 9% house advantage, its easier to
stomach that whopper when you know and understand youre there for a few minutes of
fun and free beer, not to win.
Remember, never make a Big 6/8 bet for more than $3. Instead, if you want more
than $3 action on the 6 or 8, always Place it to take advantage of the 7:6 Place odds.
Buy and Lay Bets
The Buy bet (and its cousin, the Lay) may be considered good or bad
depending on whether you pay the vig up front or after a win. Lets look at Buying the 4
or 10. The house advantage is a reasonable 1.64% if you pay the vig after a win, but
jumps to an unreasonable 4.76% if you pay it up front. Note that, although Buying the 4
or 10 with an up-front vig has a 4.76% house advantage, its still better than Placing the 4
or 10, which has a 6.67% house advantage.
Suppose we Buy the 4 for $100. For Buy bets, we must pay a 5% tax, or vigorish,
for the privilege of getting true odds. Suppose we have to pay the vig up front, which
means we pay the 5% vig at the time we make the bet. So, you drop a $100 chip in the
Come box and tell the dealer, Buy the four, please. The dealer responds, Drop me
another nickel for the vig. You then drop a $5 chip as payment to get true odds.
Suppose the shooter rolls a 7-out on the next roll. You lose your $100 Buy bet, so your
total loss for that bet is $105 (i.e., $100 for the bet and $5 for the up-front vig).
Now, suppose we Buy the 4 for $100 but we dont have to pay the vig unless we
win. So, you drop a $100 chip and tell the dealer to Buy the 4. The shooter then rolls a
7-out and you lose your Buy bet. Since you didnt win, you dont have to pay a vig,
which means your total loss for this bet is $100. If the shooter rolls a 4 before a 7, your
Buy bet wins and the dealer pays you $200 (i.e., 2:1 true odds), but then asks you to drop
a $5 chip for the 5% vig.
Its clear that paying the vig up front greatly increases the house advantage.
Therefore, I suggest that, if youre in a town with several casinos, find one that requires
the vig after a win. Personally, if I have a choice of where to play and a casino makes me
pay the vig up front, I immediately turn around, walk out, and go to the casino next door.
But if that casino is the only game in town, you must suck it up and accept the fact that
theyre screwing you to the max.
All Other Bets
Its easy to see whether the other bets are good or bad by simply using Table 9-2 to
compare their true odds to casino odds. I categorize good bets as having a 2% or less
house advantage, maybe bets as having a 2-to-4% house edge, and bad bets as having
a house edge greater than 4%.
Hedge Bets
Hedging is making one bet to protect another. Youll frequently see players
make a $5 (or $10) Pass Line bet and then hedge it with a $1 Any Craps bet. If the
shooter rolls anything but a craps on the come-out roll, the Any Craps bet loses (but its
only $1, so its not too painful). If the shooter rolls a craps on the come-out, the $5 Pass
Line loses, but the $1 Any Craps wins. The casino odds for Any Craps is 7:1, so the
player wins $7. The player believes that the $1 Any Craps bet protects the $5 Pass Line
bet from losing on the come-out roll.
Another less-common hedge bet is using a $1 Hard 6 or 8 to help protect the
players Dont Pass with Odds. For example, suppose you make a $5 Dont Pass bet, the
point is 8, and you then lay $12 in Odds against the point. You then make a $2 Hard 8 bet
to essentially take away one of the ways you can lose the Dont Pass. If the shooter makes
her point by rolling 8 the Hardway (i.e., 4-4), your Dont Pass with Odds lose. However,
in this example, the shooter made her point by rolling 8 the Hardway, so your $2 Hard 8
bet wins. Casino odds for the Hard 8 are 9:1, so you win $18. Therefore, your $17 Dont
Pass with Odds bets lose but youre protected because your Hard 8 bet wins $18. The
bad news about this hedge bet is that, if the shooter makes her point the easy way (i.e., 6-
2, 2-6, 5-3, or 3-5), then you lose both your Dont Pass and Hard 8 bets.
Hedging sounds fairly smart, right? In the short-term, maybe. In the long-term,
definitely not. If you hit a 20-minute stretch of time where the distribution goes crazy and
every other roll produces a 2, 3, or 12, then maybe a $1 Any Craps is a good hedge to
protect your Pass Line bet. Maybe. If it works and you win a few Any Craps bets, then
the table will think youre a genius. But in the long-term, youll lose. The crazy variance
in the distribution that shows a 2, 3, or 12 every other roll wont last long. Therefore, if
you consistently hedge your bets, youll lose over time. Why?
Remember, for the player, craps is a negative expectation game. Everything on
the table (except the true odds bet) is a negative for the player. No possible combination
of negative-expectation bets exists that yields a positive expectation. In other words, you
cant mix two or more negative-expectation bets into something thats in your favor. Its
important to understand that concept. Using a bad bet (e.g., Any Craps, Hardway) to
hedge a good bet (e.g., Pass Line, Dont Pass) only makes the good bet worse.
If you cant control the urge to use hedges, then do it carefully. You think, What
difference does it make? Its only a buck. A measly buck is worth it to protect my $5
Pass Line. That kind of thinking will take you straight to the poor house. Those
measly $1 chips quickly add up over a few hours of play. Before you know it, youve
pissed away $50 on hedge bets and youre scratching your head wondering where your
money went.
Chapter 10: The Secret to Craps 105
Chapter 10
The Secret to Craps
If the casino has such an advantage, why on Earth does anyone play the game?
My guess is that most people dont have a clue theyre playing a losing game. Others are
so arrogant they think they can outplay the casino and turn a negative expectation into a
positive, even over the long-term. Others know theyll lose, but play anyway for fun and
excitement. As a knowledgeable player, why should you even bother playing a game you
know will beat you? As a knowledgeable player, is there any hope you can walk away a
winner, at least once in a while, even though youre at a statistical disadvantage?
Craps is a game of numbers and statistics, with the house having a built-in
advantage. Since craps is based on statistics, lets find a way to use statistics to our
advantage. Youll never beat the casino over the long haul, but you can, indeed, beat it in
the moments of time when the distribution hiccups and things go your way.
Lets talk about variance, which is the average squared deviation of each number
from the mean of a data set. Huh? Dont worry; we dont need a Harvard math degree to
understand this. Its a measure of how spread out the data is. Lets consider the coin-flip
example we discussed earlier.
Suppose we flip a coin 10,000 times. We expect heads to appear about 5,000
times and tails to appear about 5,000 times. Suppose we bet $1 on heads for each flip. If
these are even-money bets, we expect to break even--or close to it--after those 10,000
flips. As illustrated earlier in the coin-flip example, the house doesnt give us even money
when they lose. Instead of paying us $1 for each loss, suppose they pay us only $0.96.
With this built-in house advantage, our negative expectation is to lose about $200 after
10,000 flips. Heres the math. If we expect about 5,000 heads and about 5,000 tails to
appear, then we expect to lose 5000 x $1 = $5000; and win 5000 x $0.96 = $4800.
$5000 - $4800 = $200.
Now, of those 10,000 flips, suppose we focus on only 30 of them, and we continue
betting on heads. Of those 30 flips, we might see heads 25 times and tails only 5 times.
This data fluctuation shows that, for a limited number of flips over a short period of time,
we can get lucky and experience Nirvana where things go our way. I call it a Nirvana
hiccup in the distribution that causes a relatively high variance. In this example of
only 30 flips, we win $24 for the 25 heads (i.e., 25 x $0.96 = $24), and lose $5 for the 5
tails (i.e., 5 x $1 = $5), which gives us a net win of $19. This short-term variance
temporarily removes the long-term negative expectation, which means there are, indeed,
times when we can walk away a winner.
Although youll lose in the long-term, there are times when youll win because of
variance. Suppose you take a three-day vacation in Vegas once a year and play four
one-hour craps sessions each day (i.e., a total of 12 hours for the trip). You could
conceivably get extremely lucky and hit that Nirvana hiccup during each session, and then
go home a big winner. In that case, you go home thinking youre a genius, a craps god,
invincible, a world-class gambling stud. Yeah, sure, okay. I dont recommend quitting
your day job.
Now, suppose youre a Vegas local who plays an hour every day after work. In
this case, its clear that whatever few Nirvana hiccups you experience will be properly
adjusted over time such that youll lose your shirt in the long-term.
Therefore, the infrequent craps player can, indeed, consistently win if shes lucky
enough to hit those Nirvana hiccups. However, the frequent long-term player has no
chance of coming out a winner at the end of his craps life.
The secret. Have you figured it out yet?
The Secret to Craps
The secret to craps is being at the table when those Nirvana hiccups occur and then
taking full advantage of them. Easier said than done. How do you time it just right to be
there when those hiccups hit? You think, Its impossible to know when the dice are
going to show a high variance in the players favor. Your secret is as much B.S. as the
guy trying to sell me a seminar on dice setting. Wait a second; give me a chance to
explain.
Youre right; you never know when a Nirvana hiccup will occur. Thats why you
must manage your money to endure the losses so youre at the table when heaven appears.
You think, Oh, great, here comes yet another twist on the money-management theory.
Well, sort of. The difference between what youve probably read in other material and
what youll read here is that I offer more than simply, Set win and loss limits, and dont
lose all your money in one session. Unless youre an experienced craps player, thats
useless advice without an explanation of how to do it in a way that maximizes your fun
and minimizes your losses.
So, the secret to craps isnt simply the terse statement, ...be at the table for the
Nirvana hiccups. The secret also includes a detailed explanation of a proven method that
combines smart play (allowing you to survive long enough to be there when Nirvana
finally occurs) with lots of fun and excitement.
After countless hours of play and trying every system out there, I know that the
approach I use is the optimal mix of smart play, money management, and betting action
that gives you the best chance of surviving to be around for the once-in-a-blue-moon hot
roll. Remember, part of the equation is betting action. Without that variable, craps is
just another boring game that youll eventually lose.
Technically, the smartest thing you can do at a craps table is play only Pass/Dont
Pass with Odds because that allows you to play with the lowest house advantage.
However, do you know how boring that is? A shooter may roll number after number,
never hitting the point or a 7. You stand there, lean on the rail, ready to fall asleep waiting
for something to happen. What kind of fun is that?
So, betting action is an important part of the equation. Lets be honest; youre not
going to make a living playing craps. You go to Vegas for fun and excitement. If you go
expecting to hit it big, youre a fool. Without enough betting action, you greatly minimize
that fun and excitement, which defeats the whole reason for going on vacation to Vegas in
the first place. The trick is to find the optimal mix of smart play, money management, and
betting action that gives you best chance of surviving at the table and the most fun and
excitement.
You think, Your secret isnt much of a secret. Seems kind of obvious to me. I
agree that it does, indeed, seem terribly obvious. But apparently it isnt. In fact, I know it
isnt. Sadly, few people understand this concept.
Ive seen it many times (and so will you after a few hours of playing time). A
player walks up to the table, gets $200 in chips, and then says, Sixty-four across
including the point. Give me a Horn High Yo and all the Hardways for a nickel each.
(That is, he Places the 4, 5, 9, and 10 each for $10; he Places the 6 and 8 each for $12; he
wants a $4 Horn with $2 on the 11; and he wants the Hard 4, 6, 8, and 10 each for $5.)
Wow! This guy sounds cool. He must really know what hes doing. The babe who was
flirting with you now shifts her attention to the cool guy. The guy then says, Okay, boys,
I feel lucky tonight. Come on, shooter, make me some money. The shooter flashes a
quick smile, picks up the dice, and rolls a 7. Game over. The guy just lost half his buy-in.
Fifteen minutes later, he loses the rest of his money and leaves the table disgusted with
everyone for being such lousy shooters. His losses werent his fault; they never are. Its
always the lousy shooters fault. The babe rolls her eyes at the loser, and then picks up
where she left off with you.
They keep coming, arriving full of vigor and enthusiasm. Less than 30 minutes
later, they leave miserable and disgusted. One after the other, they keep coming and
going. All the while, youre planted firmly in your spot at the end of the table next to the
dealer. By now, you know all the dealers names. You know their favorite sports teams,
their wives and girlfriends names, and their golf handicaps. Youre a rock, there to stay.
You cant be a rock if you play off-the-cuff willy-nilly making stupid bets. Thats
what most people do. They either try to impress everybody with big bets and a bunch of
craps lingo, or they dont know anything about the game and simply imitate other losers.
Remember the James Bond movie where he walks up to the craps table and spews out all
kinds of craps jargon? He sounds so slick, but he makes just about every bad bet possible;
then he gets lucky and wins. Thats Hollywood, not reality. If you play like that, youll
lose in a heartbeat. So, whats the secret? Whats the right way to play thats smart yet
provides lots of fun and excitement?
The Optimal Approach for Fun and Survival

I think Ive tried every system ever recorded on paper, parchment, animal skin, or
on the Internet, including several that I dreamed up myself. The approach Im about to
describe has consistently proven to lose me less money over longer periods of time than
anything else Ive tried. Note that I said, ...lose less over longer periods of time. I
wont spread sunshine up your ass by saying you can quit your job and win millions using
this approach. The fact is that no system is a guaranteed winner. If anyone says they have
a winning system, then hes full of crap and you should immediately tune him out. Ill
talk more about systems in a later chapter.
Its critical for you to understand that craps is a losing game for the player over the
long haul. The secret is to lose as little as possible while waiting for the Nirvana hiccup,
but to maximize your fun and excitement.
A cardinal rule that you must never break is that you must never gamble with more
than you can afford to lose. If you lose all your gambling money before its time to go
home, you must always have the discipline to avoid the ATM machine. If you lose your
entire allotment for a particular playing session, you must never dig into your wallet to
steal a few dollars from the next sessions allotment. You must have discipline. You
must never surrender to temptation. At appropriate times throughout this chapter, Ill
repeat that rule for emphasis.
1. Attitude
If you gamble, chances are youll lose. No ifs, ands, or buts. You must
understand and accept that fact. How do you think the Vegas casinos paid for all their
fancy stuff? Of course! By taking money from all the millions of losers who flock to
Vegas each year. You must treat craps as just another form of entertainment. Instead of
paying $200 for a nice dinner and show, you pay $200 for a few hours of fun and
excitement at the craps table. If you get lucky and walk away with some of your $200 still
in your pocket, then thats icing on the cake.
You must never walk up to a craps table expecting to win. You can be positive,
have discipline, play smart, and hope to win, but you must not expect to win. No matter
how hard you hope, you must always keep in the back of mind that the game is designed
for you to lose. Dont take it so seriously that its no longer fun. If you happen to walk
away having won a few bucks, then your vacation was that much sweeter.
I dont believe in all the psycho-babble mumbo-jumbo about how positive
expectations can affect the outcome of your play. None of that mojo is going to make the
dice land any differently than how they want to land. Yes, its important to maintain
discipline, play smart, and be positive, but you must remain in reality. Reality is that the
game is designed to beat you, no matter how hard you wish or expect to win. Any mind
meld that you hope to make with the dice through positive mojo isnt going to help. The
reason for maintaining a positive attitude isnt to affect the outcome of your play; its to
help ensure you have fun.
Have discipline, play smart, and most importantly have fun. Otherwise, youll
ruin your vacation by getting mad because you couldnt beat a game that you were never
supposed to beat.
2. Plan
Lets assume youre an average Joe (or Jane) who makes an average salary and
youre going to Vegas for a four-night gambling vacation (no kids, no sight-seeing,
minimal shopping). Try to plan your trip to get some idea of how long youd like to
spend playing craps. Your plan doesnt have to be firmly set in concrete, but you need
some idea of how much gambling youll do to get some idea of how much money youll
need. For example, suppose you arrive at noon on Sunday and depart at 7:00am on
Thursday. Your plan might look something like in Table 10-1. (Note that activities can
be done with or without your spouse!) Your plan can be more or less detailed, but the
point is that you must do some level of planning.
Table 10-1. Basic Vegas Vacation Plan

DAY and TIME ACTIVITY
Sunday, 2:00-4:00pm Craps
Sunday, 4:00-5:00pm Slots
Sunday, 5:00-7:00pm Dinner
Sunday, 7:00-11:00pm Poker
Sunday, 11:00pm-1:00am Slots
Monday, 10:00am-Noon Craps
Monday, Noon-1:00pm Lunch
Monday, 1:00-4:00pm Poker
Monday, 4:00-5:00pm Craps
Monday, 5:00-7:00pm Dinner
Monday, 7:00-10:00pm Go to a Show
Monday, 10:00pm-1:00am Craps
Tuesday, 10:00am-Noon Craps
Tuesday, Noon-1:00pm Lunch
Tuesday, 1:00-4:00pm Poker
Tuesday, 4:00-5:00pm Slots
Tuesday, 5:00-7:00pm Dinner
Tuesday, 7:00-9:00pm Craps
Tuesday, late night Dancing (w/spouse)
Wednesday, Noon-2:00pm Craps
Wednesday, 2:00-5:00pm Shopping (w/spouse)
Wednesday, 5:00-7:00pm Dinner
DAY and TIME ACTIVITY

Wednesday, 7:00-10:00pm Poker
Wednesday, 10:00pm-2:00am Craps
Thursday, 5:30am Go to Airport
Its emphasized that this plan is highly flexible and will change because of many
influences, such as whether you win or lose during a particular gambling session.
Remember, this is simply a starting point that allows you to estimate how much gambling
money you should bring. If you dont have the discipline to make such a plan, then you
have no chance of maintaining the discipline necessary to be a successful craps player.
(In terms of craps, success is measured by how little you lose and how much fun you
have; not by how much you win.)
3. Budget
Using your plan, estimate the amount of gambling money you need. This estimate
must be based on the table limits you plan to play. I prefer to play at $3 tables, but
oftentimes you wont find anything less than $5 minimums. Most Vegas Strip casinos
have $5 and $10 minimums, but a few $3 tables are still around. Also, Downtown
Fremont Street still has a few. Dont forget the off-Strip casinos, too; several of which
have $3 tables that offer good odds.
Lets assume you do your homework--as a good craps player would do--and
decide to play at my favorite Vegas Strip casino that has $3 tables. Good choice! Its not
the fanciest place in town, but its on the Strip, its comfortable, the dealers are friendly,
and most importantly it has $3 tables that offer the highest odds in town. (By the way, if
youre a novice craps player, its better to learn on a $3 table than a $5 table because its
easier to stomach a $3 mistake than a $5 mistake.)
A rule of thumb that I always use is to buy-in for $100 per two-hour-or-less
session. If a session is planned for more than two hours, then I add $50 for each
additional hour. Ive found that this amount is large enough to endure a few cold streaks,
yet small enough so my total craps play for the trip doesnt cost me a fortune. Using this
rule of thumb, lets create Table 10-2 with a new column to identify how much craps
money I need for each session. Well focus on only the craps sessions, but when you do
your planning, dont forget to estimate how much to bring for whatever other games you
want to play.
Table 10-2. Amount of Gambling Money to Bring

DAY and TIME ACTIVITY $ NEEDED
Sunday, 2:00-4:00pm Craps $100
Sunday, 4:00-5:00pm Slots
Sunday, 5:00-7:00pm Dinner
Sunday, 7:00-11:00pm Poker
Sunday, 11:00pm-1:00am Slots
Monday, 10:00am-Noon Craps $100
Monday, Noon-1:00pm Lunch
Monday, 1:00-4:00pm Poker
Monday, 4:00-5:00pm Craps $100
Monday, 5:00-7:00pm Dinner
Monday, 7:00-10:00pm Go to a Show
Monday, 10:00pm-1:00am Craps $150
Tuesday, 10:00am-Noon Craps $100
Tuesday, Noon-1:00pm Lunch
Tuesday, 1:00-4:00pm Poker
Tuesday, 4:00-5:00pm Slots
Tuesday, 5:00-7:00pm Dinner
Tuesday, 7:00-9:00pm Craps $100
Tuesday, late night Go Dancing
Wednesday, Noon-2:00pm Craps $100
Wednesday, 2:00-5:00pm Shopping
Wednesday, 5:00-7:00pm Dinner
Wednesday, 7:00-10:00pm Poker
Wednesday, 10:00pm-2:00am Craps $200
Thursday, 5:30am Go to Airport
Total for craps for the entire trip = $950
It adds up fast! For this trip, based on the frequency I plan to play (i.e., eight
sessions) and the table limits I plan to play (i.e., at a $3 table), I must bring at least $950
for craps (this is for craps only, and doesnt include money for any other gambling).
If thats how much time you plan to play, then thats how much money you should
bring. You should not assume youll win or break even in an early session to sustain your
play in a subsequent session. Instead, you should assume that youll lose your entire
allotment for each session. Yes, thats right. For purposes of determining how much
money to bring for craps, you must assume youll lose everything. This ensures you dont
go broke before its time to go home. For example, suppose you plan to play eight two-
hour sessions, and instead of bringing $800 (i.e., 8 sessions x $100 per session = $800),
you bring only $400. What happens if your first four sessions are ice cold and you lose
everything? What are you going to do the rest of your time in Vegas? Theres nothing
worse than being broke in Vegas. Trust me, it sucks walking the Strip with empty
pockets.
Remember: You must never gamble with more than you can afford to lose. If you
lose all your gambling money before its time to go home, you must always have the
discipline to avoid the ATM machine.
You probably wont lose your entire allotment for each session, but for planning
purposes, you should always assume you will. For example, you might lose $50 after
session #1, lose $15 after session #2, win $25 after session #3, lose $90 after session #4,
win $80 after session #5, etc. What should you do with the leftover money after each
session, if there is any?
Your first option is to lock it up in your wallet and not touch it for the remainder of
your trip. You can even consider any leftover money as winnings. For example, suppose
your first session results in a $75 loss, which means you cash out for $25. Put that $25
away and consider it a win! Look at it this way. You paid $100 for that mornings fun
and entertainment, but then you got a $25 rebate at the end. Its like you won $25. (Well,
as I said, this is one way to stay positive and enjoy your vacation.)
Your other option is to apply the leftover money to subsequent sessions. Although
you always play smart and maintain your discipline and positive attitude, you decide that
youre on vacation and you dont care if you lose everything. For example, suppose your
second session results in only a $10 loss, which means you cash out for $90. You can
divide that $90 among your remaining sessions however you want. Blow it all on the next
session and buy-in for $190 instead of just $100. Or divide it equally among all remaining
sessions. Its up to you. Do it however you think will result in the most fun.
4. Bet, Be Patient, and Enjoy
Finally, we get to the heart of this whole book. You think, How do you bet to
minimize your losses so you can be around to win big during a Nirvana hiccup, while at
the same time have enough betting action to make it fun? To reiterate, after trying lots of
different systems, Ive found that the following approach allows me to lose less money
over longer periods of time, which gives me a better chance of being at the table when a
hot roll appears.
The object is not to win every session. That wont happen, so dont expect it.
Instead, the object is to minimize your losses for each session while waiting for the hot
roll, and to enjoy it, have fun with it. Then, when that incredible hot roll does come, itll
likely make up for all your losses.
For example, suppose you play four sessions for a total loss of $200. After your
afternoon stroll up and down the Strip with your wife, you start your next session. Still a
rock. Still maintaining your discipline, smart play, and positive attitude. After two hours,
youre down to the last $30 of your buy-in. Its getting close to dinner time. Your wife
walks up and puts her arm around you.
Hows it going, Honey? she asks.
Like that knucklehead Clark Griswold in the movie Vegas Vacation, you respond,
Im about even.
The shooter rolls another 7-out. Good grief.
Ready for dinner? she asks.
Yeah, just one more shooter, then well go.
The shooter rolls and establishes 4 as the point.
You turn to your wife and say, This wont take long. The way things have been
going, no way hell make a four.
She smiles. You catch her glancing down at your pitiful chip stack. Her smile
turns to a frown.
The shooter rolls a 4. Woohoo! The first point made in a half an hour. You
collect your winnings. The shooter is on fire hitting point after point, rolling number after
number. Your bets are pressed up so high youve gone beyond those pathetic red ($5) and
green ($25) chips. The dealer is using black ($100) chips for your bets. Woohoo! This is
heaven, baby!
Everyones screaming, laughing, clapping, and jumping up and down. You catch
your wife glancing down at your chip stack again, this time with a big smile. Finally, the
shooter rolls a 7-out. Game over. You count your chips and realize that you won $550.
Woohoo! That makes up for your earlier losses and will probably make up for subsequent
losses youll incur during the remainder of your trip. At this rate, you might break even
for your whole four-day vacation. Woohoo!
After coloring up, you try to sneak the black chips into your pocket before your
wife realizes whats going on. Too late.
Great job, Honey! she says. Now we can go to that fancy restaurant up the
street. You can get a ribeye and I might try the salmon.
Good grief. There goes a quick $250 on food, wine, and tip. Oh, well, at least
your wife will be happy.
Thats the scenario you should hope for. Youll probably lose a few hundred
dollars over several sessions, but if you can hang around long enough for a hot roll, the
winnings from that one roll might make up for all your losses.
You think, Enough already. Just tell me how to do it!
Okay, relax! Ill briefly explain my approach and then illustrate it in a scenario.
Assume I play at a $3 table and my buy-in is $100. Ready?
Step 1: Make a $3 Pass Line bet and take double Odds. This keeps the house
advantage well under 1% (i.e., 0.6%), which means the house barely has an edge on you.
Step 2a (if the point is 4, 5, 9, or 10): After the point is established, Place both the
6 and 8 for $6 each. Now, three different numbers are winners for you so root for the
point, the 6, or the 8 to hit. The Place bets add extra betting action that greatly increases
your fun and excitement. Notice that these two initial Place bets are on the two numbers
that have the lowest house advantage for Place bets, and they have the greatest numbers of
ways to make them (i.e., five ways to make the 6, and five ways to make the 8; therefore,
10 ways out of 36 for you to hit one of those Place bets). This puts $21 in play for this
game (i.e., $3 Pass Line with $6 in Odds and two $6 Place bets), which means you have to
lose five games without hitting anything before losing your entire $100 allotment for this
session. Thats unlikely. Possible, but unlikely.
Step 2b (if the point is 6 or 8): If the point is 6, then Place the 8 for $6. If the
point is 8, then Place the 6 for $6. This puts a total of $14 in play (i.e., $3 Pass Line
with $5 in Odds, and a $6 Place bet).
Dont make any other bets. Be patient and wait for your numbers to hit. Notice
that you make good, smart bets that have some of the lowest house advantages. Also,
your Place bets increase your action, so each roll is more fun and exciting than if you had
made only Pass Line with Odds bets.
If the shooter rolls the point, pick up your Pass Line winnings and then make
another $3 Pass Line bet. Leave your Place bets on the table (remember, theyre
automatically off on the come-out roll of a new game).
Step 3: The first time any of your Place bets hit, put the winnings in your chip
stack (i.e., dont press or increase the Place bet).
Step 4: As your Place bets continue hitting, use the winnings to Place the
remaining inside numbers until you have them all covered either with the Pass Line or
Place bets. (The inside numbers are 5, 6, 8, and 9.) For example, if the point is 6, your
Pass Line bet covers the 6 and your Place bet that you made in Step 2b covers the 8;
therefore, as your Place bet hits, cover the remaining inside numbers, which are 5 and 9.
This intermediate objective is to cover the inside numbers with the Pass Line
and/or Place bets. This wont occur often because, most of the time, the shooter rolls a
7-out before you cover all the inside numbers.
If the shooter makes the point, leave all your Place bets on the table and continue
with Step 4 after a new point is established.
Again, you wont get this far very often. Be patient and disciplined. Get to know
the dealers or your playing partners. Have fun.
Step 5: After all the inside number are covered, its time to take profit. The next
time one of your Place bets hit, put the winnings in your chip stack.
Step 6: As your Place bets continue hitting, use the winnings to cover the 4 and 10
with Place bets.
Your second objective is to cover all the numbers (i.e., 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, and 10) with
the Pass Line and Place bets. This occurs only a few times during your entire two-hour
session, so dont expect to see it every other game.
Now, it starts to get really exciting. Stop talking to the hot hooker next to you.
Nows not the time to fantasize. Besides, your wife may come in at any moment. (Wives
a mile away can smell when their husbands are about to make major moolah.)
Step 7: As your Place bets continue hitting, alternate between taking the winnings
and pressing the bet. I call this my press mode. I tell the dealer, Were in press mode
now, baby! By now, the hot babe next to me spilling out of her halter top is invisible.
All my attention is focused on the game.
Press means to double the bet. For example, suppose your $6 Place bet on the 8
hits. Tell the dealer, Press it. Because the casino odds for a Place 8 are 7:6, your $6 bet
wins $7. The dealer puts a $1 chip in the apron in front of you and puts the remaining $6
on your Place 8 to double it to $12. Pick up the $1 chip and put it in your chip stack.
Notice that the dealer maintains your Place 8 bet at a multiple of $6 so youll continue
getting the full casino odds of 7:6. For example, now if your $12 Place 8 hits, you
win $14.
As long as the shooter rolls numbers, keep alternating between pressing and taking
profit. Both the size of your chip stack and the size of your Place bets will grow. As your
Place 4, 5, 9, and 10 grow to the appropriate amounts, dont forget to change them from
Place bets to Buy bets. For example, if your $5 Place 4 wins and its time to press it up
to $10, tell the dealer, Buy the four, please. The dealer splits your $9 winnings by
putting $4 in the apron in front of you, and the remaining $5 on your Place 4, which
brings the total amount on your 4 up to $10. He moves your chips from the Place position
in the point box to the Buy position, and puts a BUY button on top of them. Now, if the
number 4 hits again, you win $19 (i.e., $20 for the 2:1 bet, minus a $1 vig) instead of
only $18 if it had remained a Place bet. Remember, some casinos wont let you Buy the 4
and 10 for less than $20. In that case, simply press your Place bet until you get it to $20
and then Buy it.
If its a true hot roll, youll soon have green and black chips in your chip stack, and
your Place/Buy bets will be pressed up to $50, $75, and even $100 each. Think of that!
Every time your $100 Buy 4 hits, you win $200 (minus a $5 vig). Woohoo!
Settle down. Dont get too excited. This doesnt happen very often during the
relatively short time that youre at the table. As noted earlier, youll probably lose most
sessions. If youre lucky enough to get to Press Mode in Step 7, the shooter usually then
rolls a 7-out and you lose everything. When that happens, you have to start over at Step 1.
Occasionally, theres a roll where you press some Place bets a few times before a
7-out. Those are the times that help replenish your chip stack for the next several losing
rolls.
You think, If you cant tell when a good roll is coming, why not just bet $3 on the
Pass Line with $50 in Odds, and Place the 6 and 8 for $24 each. Then, if they hit a couple
of times, you make $50, $75, or even $100 dollars.
That sounds exactly like my brother. He has no patience at all. I hate it when he
says, Just put fifty dollars in Odds so we can get out of here. If we win, we win big. If
we lose, we can go do something else. I respond, Go do what? Ive seen that damn
sinking ship a hundred times! Shut up and let me play my own game!
The obvious danger is that, after putting $100 in play in one game, the shooter can
immediately roll a 7-out and you lose your entire allotment for that session. In less than a
minute, you lose $100. Now what?
Reminder: You must never gamble with more than you can afford to lose. If you
lose your entire allotment for a particular playing session, you must never dig into your
wallet to steal a few dollars from the next sessions allotment.
Using my brothers philosophy, you could win or lose a lot quickly. If youre
willing to take that chance, and if you have something else to do for a couple hours if you
lose, then go for it. But youve defeated your purpose for going to Vegas. You went to
have fun gambling. If you lose all your money literally in one minute, youre stuck in
Vegas with empty pockets and nothing to do but watch the water fountains and volcano.
They get really old after seeing them five or six times.
The smart, disciplined approach allows you to lose less over a longer period of
time, while still having enough betting action to keep it fun. It allows you to be at the
table longer; thereby, increasing your chance of hitting the Nirvana hiccup.
Lets look at a hot-roll scenario so everything about this approach is clear.
Remember, if the shooter rolls a 7-out, you lose your bets and must start over at Step 1 in
the process.
1. A new game is about to start. Make a $3 Pass Line bet. The shooter rolls a 5,
so the point is 5.
2. Take double Odds on the point, which in this case is $6. Then, put $12 in the
Come box and tell the dealer, Place the six and eight, please. Remember, the Place
odds for the 6 and 8 are 7:6, which means your bets should be in $6 multiples. The dealer
splits your $12 and puts $6 on the 6, and $6 on the 8.
3. The shooter immediately rolls a 5 to make her point. Game over. You clap,
cheer, and say, What took you so long, shooter? The dealer pays you $3 for your Flat
Pass Line bet and $9 for your Odds bet. Pick up all your winnings, but leave $3 on the
Pass Line for the next new game. Notice that your Place bets on the 6 and 8 remain on the
table and are automatically off on the come-out for the next new game.
4. The shooter rolls a 6, so the point is 6. Take $5 in Odds on the point. Note that
the point is now 6, which is already covered by your Place 6 bet. You dont want that
number covered twice, so move your Place 6 bet to either the 5 or 9. Tell the dealer,
Move my six to the five, please. The dealer picks up your $6 Place 6 bet and moves $5
of it to the 5 and returns $1 to you by placing a $1 chip on the apron. Pick up that $1 chip
and put it in your chip stack. (Remember, the Place odds for the 5 and 9 are 7:5, so the
bet should be in $5 multiples.) Your Place 8 bet that was automatically off on the
come-out is now automatically back on. Now, you have three numbers covered: the 6 is
covered by your Pass Line bet, and the 5 and 8 are covered by Place bets.
5. The shooter rolls a 10, which means nothing to you. The shooter rolls a 12,
which means nothing to you. You blow off a little excitement by saying, Come on, six
or eight. Come on, baby! The shooter rolls a 2, which means nothing to you.
6. The shooter rolls a 5. You hit your first Place bet. Your Place 5 wins $7. Take
the profit when your first Place bet hits, so tell the dealer, Same bet, please. The dealer
puts $7 in the apron in front of you. Pick up your winnings and put them in your chip
stack.
7. The shooter rolls an 8. Your Place 8 wins $7. Cover the remaining inside
numbers with Place bets, so tell the dealer, Place the nine, please. The dealer splits your
winnings and puts $5 in the 9 box, and then puts $2 in the apron in front of you. Pick up
the $2 and put it in your chip stack. Now, you have all the inside numbers covered: the 6
is covered by your Pass Line bet; and the 5, 8, and 9 are covered by Place bets. Your
adrenalin is pumping. You forget about your wicked hangover. You magically feel
fantastic. This is the one Ive been waiting for, I can feel it. Come on, shooter, give me
some numbers!
8. The shooter rolls a 9. Your Place 9 wins $7. Pick up your winnings and put
them in your chip stack.
9. The shooter rolls an 11, which means nothing to you.
10. The shooter rolls a 6 to make her point. Game over. Woohoo! Winner,
winner, chicken dinner! The dealer pays you $3 for your Flat bet and $6 for your Odds
bet. Pick up all your winnings, but leave $3 on the Pass Line for the next new game.
Notice that your Place 5, 8, and 9 bets remain on the table and are automatically off on
the come-out roll for the next new game.
11. The shooter rolls a 7 on the come-out. Game over. For the Pass Line on the
come-out, 7 is a winner. The dealer pays you $3 for your $3 Flat bet. Pick up your
winnings, but leave $3 on the Pass Line for the next new game. Notice that you dont lose
your Place bets because they were automatically off on the come-out. The shooter
prepares to make the come-out roll for a new game.
12. The shooter rolls a 4, so the point is 4. Take $6 in Odds on the point. You
have four numbers covered: the 4 is covered by the Pass Line bet; and the 5, 8, and 9 are
covered by the Place bets. Your Place bets are now automatically back on.
13. The shooter rolls an 8. Your Place 8 wins $7. Since you dont have the 6
covered, tell the dealer, Place the six, please. The dealer puts $6 on the 6, and puts $1
in the apron in front of you. Pick up your $1 and put it in your chip stack. Now, you have
the 4 covered by your Pass line bet, and the 5, 6, 8, and 9 covered by Place bets.
14. The shooter rolls another 8. Your Place 8 wins $7 again. Tell the dealer,
Place the ten, please. The dealer put $5 on the 10, and puts $2 in the apron in front of
you. Pick up your $2 and put it in your chip stack. Now, you have all the numbers
covered: the 4 is covered by your Pass Line bet; and the 5, 6, 8, 9, and 10 are covered by
Place bets. Holy moly! Is this it? Is this the one? You try to look cool and under control
by calmly telling the dealer, Were in press mode now, baby.
15. The shooter rolls a 3, which means nothing to you. Good grief. With all those
numbers covered, you have 24 ways out of 36 to hit a winner, but the shooter rolls a 3.
Good grief.
16. The shooter rolls a 4 to make her point. Woohoo! The dealer pays you $3 for
your Flat bet and $12 for your Odds bet. Pick up all your winnings, but leave $3 on the
Pass Line for the next new game. Your Place bets remain on the table and are
automatically off on the come-out for the next new game.
17. The shooter rolls a 9 for a new point. Increase your Odds bet. Since youre
playing at my favorite casino that allows 100x Odds, you have a long way to go before
worrying about whether youre allowed to take a certain amount of Odds. You decide to
bet big and go 5x Odds, so you take $14 in Odds on the point. (Five times your $3 Flat
Pass Line bet is $15, but remember, the Odds bet for a point of 9 should be an even
number, so you take $14 in Odds instead of $15.) Notice that the 4 is now uncovered
because it was the point for the last game, and you have the 9 covered twice (i.e., covered
by your Place 9 and your new Pass Line with Odds). Simply tell the dealer, Move my
nine to the four, please, and the dealer moves your Place 9 to the 4. Now, youre back to
having all the numbers covered: the 9 is covered by your Pass Line bet; and the 4, 5, 6, 8,
and 10 are covered by Place bets.
18. The shooter rolls a 4. Your Place 4 wins $9. Consider your increased Odds
bet on the point a press (i.e., you bumped it up from 2x to 5x), so with this win on the
Place 4, its time to take profit. Tell the dealer, Same bet, please. The dealer puts $9 in
the apron in front of you, and you pick it up and put it in your chip stack.
19. The shooter rolls another 4. Man, the 4 is getting hot! You feel this is
definitely a hot roll in the making, so instead of simply pressing the 4, you drop $1 in the
Come box and tell the dealer, Buy the four and ten, please.
Huh? What just happened? First, remember that youre at my favorite casino and
they let you Buy the 4 or 10 for $10, unlike other casinos that have a $20 or $25 minimum
for Buying them. Secondly, youre too impatient to build up the 4 and 10 one at a time, so
you decide to press both of them at the same time. Your Place 4 wins $9, so instead of
pressing the 4 from $5 up to $10 and putting the remaining $4 in your chip stack, you give
the dealer $1, which he then adds to your $9 winnings for a total of $10. Then, the dealer
splits the $10 and adds $5 to the 4, and $5 to the 10. Now, you have $10 on both the 4
and 10. The dealer moves your chips from the Place position into the Buy position and
puts BUY buttons on them.
Now, all your bets look like: the 9 is covered by the Pass Line; the 5, 6, and 8 are
covered by Place bets; and the 4 and 10 are covered by Buy bets. You no longer care
about looking cool and collected. You scream, Come on, give me a four, give me a ten!
Roll some numbers, shooter!
20. The shooter rolls a 5. Your Place 5 wins $7. Thats okay. Its not a four or
ten, but Ill take it. Time to take profit, so tell the dealer, Same bet, please. The dealer
puts $7 in the apron in front of you. Pick it up and put it in your chip stack.
21. The shooter rolls a 2, which means nothing to you.
22. The shooter rolls a 4. Oh, my goodness! Yeah, baby, I love that four!
Time to press. Tell the dealer, Make it a quarter, please. Huh? What did you say?
Quarter means $25. Your $10 Buy 4 has a net win of $19 (i.e., $20 for the 2:1
odds, minus a $1 vig). The dealer takes $15 of your $19 winnings and increases your
Buy 4 from $10 to $25, and then puts the remaining $4 of your winnings in the apron in
front of you, which you pick up. You scream, Give me another four! Four, four, four!
23. The shooter rolls a 3, which doesnt matter. The shooter rolls another 3,
which doesnt matter. Stupid three. We dont want no more threes. Four, four, four!
24. The shooter rolls a 6. Your Place 6 wins $7. Time to take profit. Tell the
dealer, Same bet, then pick up your winnings and put them in your chip stack. Four,
four, four!
25. The shooter rolls an 8. Your Place 8 wins $7. Time to press. Tell the dealer,
Press it. The dealer uses your winnings to double your Place 8 from $6 up to $12, and
gives you the remaining $1, which you pick up.
26. The shooter rolls a 4. Four! Yeah, baby! Winner, winner, shrimp dinner!
Your $25 Buy 4 wins a net of $49 (i.e., $50 for the 2:1 Buy bet, minus a $1 vig). Since
this is your first winning big bet, even if it happens to be time to press instead of taking
profit, I suggest taking the profit to significantly replenish your chip stack. Tell the
dealer, Same bet. The dealer puts two $25 chips in the apron in front of you and says,
Drop me a dollar, sir. Drop a $1 chip in the Come box to pay the $1 vig, and then pick
up your two $25 chips. Those green chips look so pretty in your chip stack. Just dont let
your wife see them. Lets get back to business, the game is still on. Four, four, four!
Ill end the scenario here. From this point forward, simply alternate pressing your
bets and taking profit. If its a scorching-hot roll, your Place and Buy bets will eventually
turn into black chips. As the shooter makes a bunch of points, keep increasing the Odds
bet on the point. The Odds bet should be an average of all your Place/Buy bets. For
example, if your Place and Buy bets look like $25, $10, $18, $12, and $25, then make
your Odds bet in the range of $15 to $20.
When the shooter finally rolls a 7-out, you lose everything. If your Place and Buy
bets have green and black chips on them, it stings when you lose it all. But glance at your
chip stack and notice how much you won. The only way to win big is to alternate
pressing your bets--unless, of course, you put all your money on one bet for one game.
We already discussed why that isnt a smart play if youre on a four-day Vegas gambling
vacation with a limited bankroll.
For every hot roll you encounter, it always ends in disappointment because of the
high-dollar Place and Buy bets you lose. Thats just the way it is. Accept it. Every
time--I mean every single time--my brother and I play craps and we eventually lose a hot
roll, he whines, Dammit, I knew I should have taken my bets down. I just knew it! No
matter how many times I tell him how stupid his thinking is, he doesnt listen.
No one knows when a hot roll will end. But no one knows when a hot roll will
continue either. Suppose my brother takes all his Place bets down after accumulating $28
of profit, or he reduces his high-dollar bets all the way down to $5 or $6. Suppose the
shooter then rolls a 7-out. He gloats over his god-like omniscience and teases me about
how his chip stack is bigger than mine because he was smart to take down or reduced his
bets. But suppose the hot roll continues. Each time my $30 Place bets and $50 Buy bets
hit, I win green chips. Then, when the 7-out finally shows, its true that I lose a lot on the
Place and Buy bets, but my chip stack has red and green chips in it, whereas my brothers
chip stack has pitiful red and white ones. Which colors do you prefer, red and green, or
red and white? The bottom line is that I had much more fun and excitement with my $30
and $50 bets than he had with his measly $5 and $6 bets. Remember, youre there to have
fun.
5. Adjust to a Cold Table
Sometimes, the table goes ice cold where points and numbers just dont hit. The
distribution takes a crazy turn, but instead of turning in the players favor, it turns in the
houses favor. Lets look again at the coin-flip example. If we bet on heads again, the
distribution variance could just as easily favor tails. Those 30 flips could result in 25 tails
and only 5 heads, which means we lose big time.
A cold table is easy to recognize. Its empty, quiet, and the few people still
playing look depressed. Nothing a player does results in a win. Eight shooters in a row
establish a point and then immediately throw a losing 7-out without rolling any numbers.
If you stubbornly make a stand and try to fight a cold table, youll lose your entire
allotment in just a few minutes. You think, Thats silly because the table can change
from cold to hot at any time. Youre right, but even though each roll has a random
outcome, youll soon realize that trends do, indeed, occur. Weve already discussed one
type of trend--the hot roll. The ice cold table is simply a trend in the opposite direction. If
you dont believe cold streaks occur, then you also cant believe in hot streaks. And if
you cant believe in hot streaks, you might as well throw this book away and never play
craps.
Unless you adapt, playing a cold table is a miserable experience. You walk away a
loser vowing to never play craps again. But it doesnt have to be like that.
People insist on fighting a cold table. Why? Beats me. My only guess is that
theyre stubborn or stupid, or probably both (hey, I call em as I see em). People either
beat their chests determined to stand and fight or they leave the table altogether rather than
switch gears to play the cold table to their advantage. Its truly an amazing phenomenon.
People are so stubborn or stupid that they just wont adapt.
Without going into volumes of statistical theory, the fact is that cold streaks appear
just as hot streaks do. The key is simply to recognize them and adapt. For example,
suppose you walk up to a table with only three people playing. Its the only table with
open spots (the other two tables are packed and people are standing on the sides waiting to
play). You ask the dealer, Hows the table? He says its colder than hell (I guess that
means its fairly cold). The other players are playing the Pass Line, so you decide to try it,
too. Two quick 7-outs in a row. The other players cuss and moan. The dealers mumble
to each other, It hasnt been this cold since yesterday.
Why continue fighting the obvious cold trend and continue losing? You have
three options: 1) Stay, beat your chest, fight, and lose, 2) Leave and find another table, or
3) Stay and adapt. I never choose option 1. Sometimes, I leave, but I like my favorite $3
table so Id rather stay. I usually choose option 3.
Indeed, no one on Earth can ever know how the dice will fall (assuming legal dice
are used). But, again, trends do occur. They just do. Once you experience a few of them,
youll understand and be able to recognize them. You think, Assuming I accept the idea
that recognizable trends occur, how do I win on a cold table? Answer: Simply adapt.
Bet with the number 7 instead of against it. Always keep the Dont Pass bet in
your hip pocket as a weapon against the house when the dice are landing in houses favor.
You think, This doesnt make sense. By the time I recognize a cold streak, itll be over.
That can, indeed, happen. But thats why you slow down and become a stronger rock.
During a cold streak, dont think about winning big. Dont even think about winning at
all. Your objective is to ride out the cold streak and get back on track playing the Pass
Line and pressing Place bets. As you gain experience in recognizing trends and reversals,
youll find yourself not only successfully riding out the cold streaks, but youll
consistently come out of them a few bucks ahead. Remember, youre a rock. Let the
other suckers at the table pay for the casinos new theater showroom and boxing hall.
If youre uncomfortable switching gears to play a cold table, you can either stand
your ground and fight using the Pass Line, or leave to find another table. Its your choice.
If you stand and fight by playing the Pass Line, you must freely accept your losses if the
cold streak depletes your chip stack.
Heres my method that has demonstrated time and again to be my best weapon
against a cold table.
Step 1: Dont think of them as dreaded cold streaks. Theyre facts of life, as are
hot streaks. Play cold streaks to your advantage. You might even begin to like them
because of the money you can make. So, when a cold streak strikes, dont get pissed and
depressed as most other players do. Stay focused, stay smart, and keep having fun.
Step 2: Use the low $3 table minimum and high allowable Odds (e.g., 10x or
100x) as weapons against the casino. This is a key reason why I play at my favorite
Vegas casino. Its one of the few Strip casinos that have $3 table minimums and high
maximum Odds. When a cold streak hits, simply switch gears. Play the Dont Pass and
lay at least 2x Odds against the point. Its that simple.
Make a $3 Dont Pass bet. At a $3 table, never put down more than $3 on the
Dont Pass. Your objective is to get past the 7 and 11 on the come-out (i.e., 7 and 11 on
the come-out roll are losers for the Dont Pass). After the shooter establishes a point, lay
at least 2x Odds against the point. I suggest laying 4x Odds (which is well within our
playing limits thanks to the minimum $3 Flat bet) because laying 4x Odds makes the
house advantage a meager 0.3%. However, if youre stuck at a $5 table, laying 2x odds
keeps you within your playing limits and increases the house edge to only about 0.5%.
So, youre not giving up much by playing a $5 table and laying 2x Odds.
Step 3: If a shooter makes a point, dont immediately switch back to the Pass Line.
I suggest continue playing the Dont Pass. Ive found that, a lot of times during a cold
streak, the shooter rolls a 7-out on the next game and the cold streak continues. However,
if the shooter makes a second point, then I slow down by not making any further bets on
this shooter (I wait for him to 7-out). If he makes a couple of points and rolls a lot of
numbers before the 7-out, I may switch back to the Pass Line for the next shooter. Its a
gut feeling. Sometimes, I guess correctly and the distribution begins to correct itself (i.e.,
the dice start heating up). Sometimes, I guess flat-out wrong and the cold streak continues
with the next five shooters rolling 7-outs.
When the table is ice cold, you definitely know it. Shooter after shooter rolls a
7-out within two or three rolls of establishing a point. The challenge is to know when the
cold streak starts to melt. An indication that thawing has started is when a shooter makes
a couple of points, or several shooters roll lots of numbers before a 7-out. Its simply a
gut feeling. Youll guess wrong as often as you guess right. But you can afford to guess
wrong a few times because of all the money you won on those eight straight 7-outs while
the table was still bitter cold. Youll eventually feel comfortable that the distribution has
corrected itself, at which time you can then switch gears back to the Pass Line and Place
bets.
By changing gears to this Dont Pass method when the table is clearly cold, you
have two powerful things going for you: 1) The table is freezing, so the shooter is likely to
7-out resulting in a win for your Dont Pass, and 2) Playing the Dont Pass with Odds is
the absolute best bet you can possibly make on the craps table, in terms of house
advantage. By laying 4x Odds against the point, you lower the house advantage to less
than half of one percent (i.e., about 0.3%). Its almost an even-money game!
You want a $3 table minimum because, if you play at a $5 table, your Flat Dont
Pass with 4x Odds bets would be almost half your allotment for that one game. For
example, suppose you play at a $5 table in the middle of a cold streak. After your $5 Flat
Dont Pass bet, the shooter rolls 5 as the point. To lay 4x Odds, you have to lay $30 to
win $20. Remember, with the Dont Pass, you have the advantage over the house after the
come-out roll so when you lay Odds, you have to lay the bigger amount to win the smaller
amount. The $5 Flat bet plus the $30 Odds bet equals $35, which is almost half of your
$100 buy-in.
However, at a $3 table, 4x Odds for the Dont Pass against a point of 5 is only $18
(i.e., lay $18 to win $12). So, the $3 Flat bet plus the $18 Odds bet equals $21, which is
less than 25% of your buy-in. In other words, at a $3 table laying 4x Odds, you dont risk
a significant portion of your buy-in on one game.
You think, If this is the best bet on the craps table, why cant I play this method
all the time? Excellent question! You can. At 4x Odds, the Dont Pass has a house
advantage of only about 0.3% (thats one-third of one percent), which is about as close to
even-money as you can get. Youre wise to play this method all the time. But you
sacrifice one important variable of the equation--fun and excitement. Never forget that
your four-day Vegas vacation is focused on having fun gambling. If you dont maximize
your fun, you may not get everything that you intended from your vacation.
Playing only the Dont Pass gets boring quickly. Remember, with 4x Odds, its
essentially an even-money game, which means you lose some, then win some, then lose
some, then win some. Its a constant up and down struggle where neither the house nor
the player wins big on average. Additionally, by far, most players play the Pass Line and,
therefore, alienate the Dont Pass player. While everyone else cheers, laughs, talks, jokes,
and high-fives, you stand there leaning on the rail alone. If thats what you look for in a
vacation, then by all means, play the Dont Pass and lay 4x Odds.
You think, You tell me to maximize my fun and tell me to switch to the Dont
Pass on a cold table, but then you tell me how boring the Dont Pass is. If Im supposed
to switch to the Dont Pass for a cold table, arent you contradicting yourself? Not
really. Occasionally adapting to a cold table isnt the same as always playing the
Dont Pass.
Ice cold tables are about as frequent as hot tables, so you wont play the Dont
Pass very often. Most of the time, the table is choppy, which means it goes back and
forth from making a point to a 7-out. With a choppy table, you see short-lived lukewarm
streaks and cool streaks. Playing the Pass Line with Place bets allows you to continually
experience the full range of emotions. One game, youll lose immediately and wonder
why you waste your money. The next game, the shooter rolls lots of numbers that allows
you to press your Place bets and replenish your chip stack. You continually cuss and
moan with your playing partners one minute, and then cheer and laugh the next. Its that
full range of emotion that makes the game so much fun. The low emotions when you lose
make the high emotions when you win so sweet and exciting.
When you adapt to a cold streak, playing the Dont Pass can be fun, too. It feels
good to win the Dont Pass six times in a row because shooter after shooter rolls a 7-out.
It feels good to know youre a rock, to know you have the sense to adapt, to know you can
win when everyone else insists on fighting a losing battle. You get some kind of
perverted pleasure out of watching everyone at the table look at you in disgust because
you switched to the winning Dark Side while they stubbornly continue beating their chests
and losing. Then, when the cold streak is over, you switch back to the Pass Line and
everyone is magically your friend again.
6. Dont Toss in the Towel
Over your craps-playing life, youll likely have more losing sessions than winning
ones. Accept it. Your session losses will vary from $1 to your entire allotment. Accept
it.
Suppose, after two hours, the dice have whittled your chip stack down to $20.
You havent seen a hot roll in ages. Although losing is as much a part of the game as
winning, you cant help but feel lousy. You wonder why you even bothered coming to
Vegas in the first place. You were a rock for two hours, but it didnt work. You want to
win so badly that you lose control of your common sense. Youre down to your last $20
for the session and you have no fight left. Stop!
You must never capitulate, never surrender, never think, This sucks, Im going to
put the rest on the Hard 4 and, if I lose, then Ill leave. But if I win, Ill be right back
where I started. Thats the dumbest thing you can do at the end of a losing session.
If you insist on giving your money away, please send it to your favorite charity.
Dont give it to the casino. Occasionally, youll win one of those idiotic bets, but dont
think youll win enough over time to conquer your losses.
If you cant accept losing, you have no business gambling. If you cant stomach
losing a particular session, then quit that session and cash out. Dont piss your money
away on a terrible bet hoping to hit it big and get your money back all at once.
If its an awful session and you lose a lot quickly, then accept defeat and cash out
with the $10, $15, or $20 that you have left. Take that remaining $20, go have a beer in
the lounge, listen to the band. Put it in a nickel video poker machine and maybe hit a
1,000-coin jackpot for $50. Put it in your pocket, find your wife, and spend some time
with her. Dont relent. Do something besides piss your money away on a losing
proposition bet. Dont toss in the towel.
Reminder: If you lose your entire allotment for a particular playing session, you
must never dig into your wallet to steal a few dollars from the next sessions allotment.
Chapter 11: Winning Systems (Hogwash!) 127
Chapter 11
Winning Systems (Hogwash!)
If anyone says or writes that he has a consistently winning craps system, hes
either lying to swindle you or too stupid to know better. No consistently winning craps
system exists, has ever existed, or will ever exist. Understand? None. Dont ever let
anyone persuade you otherwise.
As noted earlier, the trick is to find the optimal mix of smart play, money
management, and betting action that gives you the best chance of surviving at the table,
and the most fun and excitement. The approach, or system, I described earlier has
consistently proven to lose me less money over longer periods of time than anything else
Ive tried. Note that I never claim the system itself makes you a winner. Statistical
variance makes you a winner, not the system. Im confident that my approach loses less
money on average over time, while maximizing your fun, than any other system youll
find in any book, magazine, or on the Internet.
Most systems spread false hope. They hardly ever change as they go from book to
book and article to article. Authors often prey on your greed, your hope for an easy score.
As with everything else that offers people a quick buck, these shysters take from the
stupid and give to themselves. Their winning systems focus on beating the house
consistently, which weve proven cant be done over time. How many of you are
experienced craps players and tried these systems at some point in your playing life? Be
honest. How many of you went to Vegas with high hopes of winning thousands using
your new-found, sure-fire, winning system that cost you $85? And, after playing your
wonderful winning system, how many of you returned home a loser? Be honest. We
all lost, including me. After many losing sessions of stubbornly pounding my head
against the wall, it finally dawned on me that the long-term objective is not to beat the
house, but to minimize your losses and maximize your fun.
You shouldnt play craps expecting to win over time. If you do have a winning
session or short-term winning streak, consider yourself lucky for experiencing a variance
that favored you at that particular time. If a consistently winning system ever did exist,
the casinos would have gone belly up years ago. Well, not really. Instead, of going belly
up, the instant some genius figured out a winning combination of bets, the casinos would
have changed the rules to bring the advantage back to them.
All craps systems are simply combinations of bets supplemented with wacky
betting schemes. Most sound impressive, scientific, and feasible. Some are simple, some
complex. The fact is, no matter what bets you combine and betting patterns you apply,
you cant overcome the house advantage. No hedge-bet method (i.e., combination of bet
types and bet amounts) will ever change the negative expectation to result in a player
advantage. The best you can hope for is to minimize the house advantage and maximize
your fun, which weve already discussed at length.
You think, This is depressing! Why do people play this game? The ignorant
and arrogant players truly believe they can either beat the house or they possess some kind
of supernatural mojo that affects the dice. However, the knowledgeable player plays for
one basic reason--its so much fun. The knowledgeable player knows hes supposed to
lose over time. This acknowledgement allows the player to enjoy the game without
worrying about winning. If he loses a session, its paid entertainment. If he wins a
session, he knows hell probably lose it during a future session. The interaction with
people, the range of emotion, and the thrill of the hot roll are what bring the
knowledgeable player back again and again.
What Is a System?
A craps system is nothing more than a process that guides you in what bets to
make, how much to bet, and when to make them. (Webster defines system as an orderly
pattern or arrangement.) If you bet a $5 Big 6 on left-handed shooters wearing green
shorts and then bet a $10 Big 8 on right-handed shooters in wheelchairs, thats a system.
If that peculiar system happens to result in you winning $100 after 20 minutes, then youll
walk away convinced its the greatest winning system ever devised. (You might even try
to sell it on the Internet for the unbelievably low price of only $39.99, plus $12 for
shipping and handling.) But never forget, its not the system that makes you a winner, its
the distribution variance at any particular instant in time.
No matter how bizarre your system may seem, if it meets your needs, then it isnt
bizarre. For example, suppose you lose $500 per hour playing that Big 6/8 system, but
suppose you get oodles of satisfaction from making those bets. For you, putting your
chips in the Big 6/8 boxes is better than honeymoon sex. In this example, your
satisfaction may be worth $500 an hour to you. If it is, then your Big 6/8 system is quite
the opposite of bizarre.
Therefore, whether a system is good or bad depends entirely on the needs of the
player using it. Whatever system you use, always understand that it will never produce a
house advantage lower than the simple Dont Pass with maximum Odds. No system is a
guaranteed long-term winner for the player.
I thought about describing a few of the more common so-called winning
systems, but quickly decided against it. They dont work over the long haul, so whats the
point? You can find many variants of progression systems, regression systems, and tons
of other really bizarre systems on the Internet. Theyre all worth about the same--nothing.
If youre curious, then by all means browse. If youre vulnerable to persuasion by claims
of easy fortune, I suggest giving your spouse the credit card before clicking the search
button.
As noted in an earlier chapter, if you simply want to minimize the house
advantage, then play the Dont Pass and lay as much Odds as you can comfortably afford.
Its that simple. Dont make any other bets (e.g., Place bets, Come bets, etc.) because the
more bets you make, the more you increase the house advantage. I cant stress enough
that theres no way to hedge any combination of bet types or bet amounts that give you a
better chance of winning than simply playing only the Dont Pass with as much Odds as
you can afford. The problem is that playing only the Dont Pass gets very boring very
quickly. If you want to optimize your game (i.e., make smart bets while maximizing your
fun and excitement), then you should consider playing my method described earlier. And
remember, even if you play only the Dont Pass, youre still going to lose over time.
The latest trend in concocting craps systems seems to include using dice setters.
More and more people are learning that no system based solely on a specific combination
of bets is a guaranteed winner. To keep their profits going, the scammers cleverly
adjusted their systems to using a betting scheme that focuses on dice setters. In an earlier
chapter, we talked in detail about how ridiculous dice setting is. So, dont fall for this
latest trend. These new systems that rely on dice setters cant guarantee a penny more of
long-term winnings than any other system ever developed or yet to be developed.
By the way, some clever shysters offer to give you their new system for free, and
then entice you to pay hundreds of dollars to teach you how to set dice yourself. I must
admit, its ingenious. Instead of paying $89 for the system, they give you the system for
free and then persuade you to pay $500 for a seminar on dice setting. Very clever, indeed.
Dont fall for it.
You think, My friend Leroy bought one of those systems and came home from
Vegas a $500 winner. He swears by it. This reminds me of my old stock-broker friend.
Long ago when I was single (seems like forever ago), my roommate in
Washington, DC, was a junior stock broker with one of the big names. As a junior broker,
his task included cold-calling and cold-mailing. One night, he invited his office buddies
over for a card game. It wasnt long before they all were mocking their clients by telling
stories of how they ripped them off. They joked about persuading sweet old ladies into
buying a stock and then laughing as they watched it drop like a brick. I interrupted their
merriment and asked, How do you guys make money if all your clients go broke? My
friend responded, Its a crap shoot.
To illustrate their game, suppose a broker uses a fancy company-generated chart to
throw a dart and pick a stock that might perform well in the near future. Its just a guess;
he doesnt know anything more about stocks than the old lady hes allegedly helping.
Suppose for every 100 cold-calls, the broker gets 10 investors, of which nine lose their
shirts. The broker gets lucky and the stock for client #10 takes off like a rocket. The
other nine losers think the broker is an idiot, but client #10 thinks hes a genius.
Client #10 is a client for life. The broker repeats the cycle and out of another 100 cold-
calls, he gets lucky with another one client. Slowly, the broker builds up his client base,
not because hes a genius, but because he got lucky with one out of every 100 cold-calls.
The situation with your friend, Leroy, is similar. For every 100 buyers of that
bogus winning craps system, theres probably one or two who get lucky and win the first
time they use it. Thats Leroy. He got lucky and happened to hit the distribution variance
just right and walked away a winner. He thinks the system is a gold mine. He thinks the
$85 price tag was well worth it. However, Ill bet you this weeks pay check that Leroy
eventually, over time, is a loser. Wanna bet?
Leroys system (for which he paid $85 plus shipping and handling) is no more a
winner than someone elses weird system of betting the Field when the shooter has blond
hair and yellow teeth. Eventually, a blond-haired, yellow-toothed shooter will get hot and
that weird system will win in the short-term.
Remember, its not the system that makes you a winner; its the distribution
variance. Any system, no matter how ridiculous, can be a short-term winner. However,
all systems are eventual losers.
Should Your System Include Win/Loss Limits?
Ive read a lot of my colleagues books and articles and, as best I can remember,
they all say that failing to set win/loss limits is one of the worst things you can do. I
disagree--partially.
Obviously, based on my approach described earlier, I agree with setting loss limits.
Divide your vacation time into sessions and set firm loss limits for each session. Without
them, you could go broke the first day and have to spend the rest of your vacation
watching the fountains and sinking pirate ship 10 times a day. Therefore, disciplined loss
limits allow you to manage your money so you dont go broke before its time to go
home.
I disagree that you should also always set win limits (always is the key word).
Many of my colleagues advocate quitting when your winning streak ends. If youre a
local and can return to the table day after day without restriction, then perhaps win limits
may serve some purpose. But if youre an occasional gambler who visits Vegas twice a
year, I believe that win limits are inappropriate.
Suppose you start your four-day vacation by playing your first craps session.
Suppose your win/loss goal is to quit the session if you lose your $100 buy-in or if you
get $150 ahead. Two minutes after you buy-in, the table goes berserk with a blistering hot
roll. The shooter throws for almost an hour without a 7-out. You interrupt your
screaming, jumping up and down, hugging, and kissing to count your chips. Holy cow,
youre $900 ahead! The shooter finally rolls a 7-out. Now what? Youve won six times
your original win goal. Do you quit? If so, how long do you quit? Do you quit altogether
and not play the rest of your trip? If you quit, what will you do in the time that you
planned to play craps?
Thats the dilemma you face if youre only an occasional gambler, which most of
us are. Personally, I keep playing. Why? I came to Vegas to play craps. I didnt come to
exercise, or go shopping, or sight-see, or eat at fancy restaurants, or ogle half-naked
pirates, or do anything else but gamble. So, why would I quit when Im ahead? If I quit
after a $900 winning session, then what? Sit at the bar drinking beer watching everyone
else have fun at the craps table? No way! Like you, Im a knowledgeable player who
understands and accepts that Im likely to lose by the time I check out of the hotel, but
thats okay with me. Its pointless for me to quit after getting $900 ahead. If I simply
wanted to make money, I wouldnt have spent $1,200 for two airplane tickets, $500 for a
hotel room, $500 (maybe more) for food, $200 for my wifes massage, and $300
(probably more) for my wifes shopping spree just to make $900 in craps. It doesnt add
up. If money were my motivation, I would have saved $1,800 simply by staying home.
However, win limits may be suitable for non-gamblers who rarely play. Suppose
you visit Vegas to attend a convention. Youve never gambled, you dont know how to
gamble, you think its a silly waste of money, or it just isnt fun for you. Your friend talks
you into going down to the casino to play craps. You dont want to go, but your friend
wont take no for an answer, so you reluctantly say, Okay, but only for an hour. Your
friend has the mojo working in high gear, rolling number after number. You dont have a
clue what youre doing as you mirror your friends bets. All you know is that the dealer
keeps giving you green chips and you keep stuffing them in your pocket. The streak
finally ends after 20 minutes and you find yourself $300 ahead. You tell your friend, Im
taking my money and running. Rather than staying for the remainder of the hour that
you said youd play, you reached a comfortable win amount and decided to quit before
losing it all. For this type of non-gambler, a win limit makes good sense.
The Gamblers Fallacy
The gamblers fallacy is the false belief that fixed odds increase or decrease
depending on recent occurrences. Lets use the coin-flip example again to illustrate this
concept. Assuming we use a fair coin and a fair flip, we expect a 50% chance that heads
will appear and a 50% chance that tails will appear. Those odds are fixed and will never
change. Suppose heads appears five times in a row. If you think tails has a better chance
of appearing on the next flip because it hasnt shown for the last five flips (i.e., you think
tails is due), then youve fallen for the gamblers fallacy. You must understand that
results of previous flips have no influence on the outcome of future flips.
In craps, the dice have no memory. They dont remember how they landed on the
last roll. They dont care if they havent shown a 7 in the last 50 rolls. The odds of any
number showing remain constant and are never influenced by what occurred previously.
Have you seen the big tote board by a roulette wheel showing the results of the
last 10 or 15 rolls? It not only shows the recent numbers that hit, but also the colors (i.e.,
red or black). Almost every roulette wheel in every casino on the planet has a tote board.
What purpose does that thing serve for either the player or the casino?
It doesnt serve the player any purpose other to sucker him into making a bet that
he wouldnt otherwise make. It serves the casinos ultimate purpose of taking advantage
of the gamblers fallacy and getting more bets in play. The more bets in play, the more
money the casino makes.
Suppose a husband and wife stroll through the casino on their way to dinner with
no intention of stopping to gamble. They approach the table-games area and see on a
particular roulette wheels tote board that the color red appeared on the last six rolls. The
guy points to the wheel and says, Look, dear, black is due for that wheel. Lets try it!
The tote board just did its job. It suckered the guy into making a bet that he wouldnt
have made had he not known that red appeared six times in a row. Yeah, sure, black is
due all right. Wrong! The little ball doesnt know it landed on red the last six times. It
only knows that both red and black have an equal chance of appearing on the next roll. It
doesnt influence itself to land on any particular number or color because of past
occurrences.
You think, So, what does this have to do with your craps system and how you
play? Maybe nothing, maybe plenty.
Suppose your system tells you to Lay the 4 for $50 only after the number 4 hits
three times in a row. Your system is based on the belief, if the number 4 shows three
times in a row, then chances are that a 7 will appear before another 4. Is this a good,
smart bet? Is this simple system good or bad?
Yes, its definitely a good bet, and this system is an acceptable way to play if you
dont mind getting bored to death. You think, Huh? Youre either nuts or full of crap!
You just finished saying the dice have no memory, and future outcomes arent influenced
by previous ones. Therefore, how can that be a good, smart bet? Calm down, let me
explain.
In this example, you make a bet only after the number 4 has appeared three times
in a row. Youre a knowledgeable player, a disciplined rock, one who sticks to your
system and doesnt allow emotion to cause you to deviate. Making a Lay 4 bet under
those specific conditions doesnt make your odds of winning or losing any different that
another person making a Lay 4 bet every time a new game starts, or at any other random
times. Regardless of when or under what circumstances you make the bet doesnt change
the odds. The Lay 4 bet with a vig after a win always has a 1.64% house advantage. It
doesnt matter whether you make the bet only after the number 4 has appeared three times
in a row, or only when the shooter takes a swig of beer, or only when theres a full moon.
The odds never change.
However, although the Lay 4 bet with a vig after a win is considered a good bet
because of its low house advantage, its possible to regard it as bad under certain
circumstances. Lets look at another example.
Suppose your system doesnt include the Lay 4 bet. Under no circumstances does
it tell you to make a Lay 4 bet. Suppose the number 4 appears eight times in a row. The
hot babe next to you falling out of her halter top says, Theres no way the four will hit
again. We should bet against it. What do you think? You respond, No thanks, Ill stick
to my system. Its been good to me so far. She wiggles a bit and says, Oh, come on, I
dont want to be the only one hoping for a seven. Her jiggling causes you to lose focus,
so you say, Maybe youre right. Another four cant possibly hit again. Lets go for it!
This is a situation where a good bet can be a bad thing. The key is that you
allowed yourself to risk more money than you had originally planned because of the
gamblers fallacy (and partly because you couldnt say no to the bimbo next to you).
Remember, the more bets you make, the more the casino wins. So, adding more bets to
your plan--even though they may be considered good because of their low house
advantages--can be hazardous to your bankroll.
Lets revisit the example of the couple strolling through the casino. Suppose the
couple were in their hotel room before going down to dinner. As the guy brushes his hair,
he says to his wife, Is it okay if we stop at the roulette wheel so I can make a quick five-
dollar bet to win some tip money? His wife responds, Sure, but we have reservations
and we cant be late. They stroll through the casino and approach the roulette wheel.
The guy sees that red has appeared six times in a row and, as a result, decides to bet $5 on
black.
Under these circumstances, using the tote board to influence his bet is harmless.
Regardless of what bet he makes (black, red, even, odd, etc.), the house still has a 5.25%
advantage. The guy came to the table intending to make a $5 bet, so the results displayed
on the tote board werent the trigger that influenced his decision to make the bet.
You think, You just spent five minutes telling me how stupid people are for
betting based on the gamblers fallacy, but your system of changing gears for a cold table
is also based on historical results. The historical results that indicate a cold table cause
you to change your bets. Does that make you an idiot, too?
I wont argue whether Im an idiot (my wife constantly tells me I am). However,
theres a difference between changing gears to play a cold table and adding to your bet
pattern because of historical results. When switching gears to play the Dont Pass on a
cold table, you actually decrease your number of bets to only one (i.e., the Dont Pass with
Odds), rather than adding to an established bet pattern. In other words, you dont put
more money at risk. Also, switching to the Dont Pass is actually smart. Remember, the
Dont Pass with 4x Odds brings the house advantage down to about one-third of one
percent--cant get much better than that. The key difference to remember is that simply
switching gears to play only the Dont Pass on a cold table doesnt put more of your
money at risk. When simply switching to the Dont Pass, the gamblers fallacy doesnt
trigger you to put more money at risk than you intended.
The moral is, dont let the gamblers fallacy cause you to make bets that you
normally wouldnt. If you still believe that previous results influence future results and--
heres the important part--if this belief causes you to risk more money than you intended,
then youre playing a dangerous game. Play smart. Be a rock. Dont fall for the
gamblers fallacy. Dont let it cause you to put more money at risk than you had planned
or that you can afford to lose.
Chapter 12: Tokes and What They Can Do for You 134
Chapter 12
Tokes and What They Can Do for You
You should tip dealers, especially when theyre helpful. In the casino business, a
toke is a tip. Dealers call tippers George or live, and non-tippers stiffs.
Dealers typically work for minimum wage plus tips. I compare them to restaurant
servers because they provide a service and they rely on tips for their livelihood. The
service that dealers provide is properly handling your bets and winnings, answering
questions about the game, being courteous and friendly, and just making your craps play
more enjoyable.
Craps dealers typically share tips instead of keeping what they get. This makes
your job of tipping a bit trickier. Ideally, you want to maximize tips for good dealers and
minimize tips for bad ones (the same way you tip good restaurant servers more than bad
ones). In terms of craps dealers, good versus bad isnt necessarily a measure of skill.
Instead, if a dealer is friendly, respectful, attentive, and funny, I wont reproach him for
being slow (he may be slow because, for example, hes new on the job). Id much rather
be in a slow game with fun dealers than a fast game with dealers who are mannequins
when they arent handling chips.
This reminds me of one of the most fun times I ever had playing craps. Once
again, I went to my favorite Strip casino to play at their sit-down table, which requires
only one person acting as dealer, stickman, and boxman because of its limited size and
number of players. As noted in an earlier chapter, the place isnt fancy and the dealers
arent hot babes (or guys) whose arms are a blur when they deal. Instead, the dealer was a
fat guy with a heavy Boston accent. Sweat beaded on his forehead. His bowtie worked
itself perpendicular to the floor instead of parallel to it, and his cummerbund was around
his chest (it kept popping up from around his belly). I thought, This guy must be a
comedian at night and here moonlighting as a craps dealer in the morning. He had a joke
for everything, but they were never offensive to anyone at the table. The problem was, he
moved slower than dirt--and thats slow! But he was so helpful, courteous, and funny that
I didnt care if it took him 20 minutes to pay me when my bets hit. I left the table two
hours later and, because the guy was so much fun, I didnt care that I walked away a $30
loser. He was slow as dirt, but he was a great dealer.
If craps dealers share tips, how do ensure yours goes to the good ones? You cant.
If Im disappointed in a dealers service, I ensure his colleagues know Im disappointed.
When the bad one takes a break and a good one replaces him, I politely tell the good one
something like, I dont know if Fred is having a bad day or what, but hes been
downright mean to the newbie on the hook. The dealer knows Ive been tipping well and
he usually gets the hint that Fred ought to lighten up if they want me to continue tipping.
Because dealers income depends on player tips, the good one wont hesitate to insist the
one lousy dealer get his act together. The good one knows, if I stop tipping, maybe others
will, too.
If youre losing during a particular session, its not the dealers fault, so dont
blame them. Its not easy to tip while losing, but you shouldnt base your tipping on your
gambling success (or failure). When losing, if you cant keep the same tipping pace as
when youre winning, simply slow down, but dont stop it altogether. Always remember
that you give tips for good service, not for your success at the table.
For whatever reason, most craps players dont tip at all. I dont know if its
because of avarice, stinginess, or just plain ignorance. Usually, youre the only one
tipping. Although not good for the dealers, thats great for you. It means you get all the
dealers attention and reap all the rewards.
Do I Get Anything from Tipping?
Absolutely, positively, undeniably yes! (Is that clear enough?)
Dealers treat tippers better than stiffs, so they help make your overall experience
more enjoyable. Thats why youre there--to have fun. If you tip, dealers tend to be more
polite to you. Theyre more likely to talk about last nights game, or where to get a juicy
steak for $5.99, or if the hot waitress youve been eyeing has a boyfriend.
Dealers tend to let you get away with many little things that alone arent important,
but when combined make a big difference in your playing experience. For example, a
dealer may request a stiff to strictly adhere to the casinos policy of where to put his
Place-bet chips on the layout. However, that same dealer may allow a steady tipper to put
her Place-bet chips on the layout wherever she wants (except, of courts, in the point
boxes--no one but the dealer can move chips in and out of the point boxes).
One Vegas morning on the way to my favorite Strip casino, I popped a couple
pieces of gum. I got to the table, bought-in for my usual $100, and soon found myself in
the middle of a hot roll with all the numbers pressed up to at least $50 each. Each time a
number hit, I got paid in green chips (that feels so good!). I also had a Hard 4 and Hard
10 working for the crew. Whenever I got paid, I tossed in $4 and I told the stickman,
Press our Hard four and ten. After several rolls, the crews Hardway bets were pressed
up to $12 each. Then, the shooter rolled a Hard 4. Woohoo! The dealers got paid $84.
The shooter continued rolling number after number and I continued pressing the crews
Hardway bets. I screamed, Any number! Four, four, four! Give me a six or an eight!
Ill take a five or nine, too! One time, I screamed so suddenly and loudly, my gum
almost shot out of my mouth. I barely caught it on the corner of my lip and had to use my
finger to shove it back into my mouth. The dealer saw the whole thing and laughed. I
didnt care how stupid I looked because now I was getting paid in black chips. I leaned to
the dealer and said, I hope you dont mind if it accidentally flies onto the table. The
dealer smiled again and said, Sir, you can spit it anywhere you want. Ill just pick it up
and wipe it off for you. Do you think he would have responded that way had I not made
bets for the crew?
Theres another benefit you get from tipping--money! Thats right; you get paid
for your generosity. You think, Huh? What the heck are you talking about?
In all my years of playing craps, never once did a dealer make a mistake in my
favor when I didnt tip. Sure, plenty of mistakes were made in the casinos favor, and I
like to think that I caught most of them, but Im sure a few got by me. However, when I
tipped, I noticed a curious trend--dealers consistently goofed in my favor.
To verify my hypothesis, one day I intentionally played for two hours without
giving any tips. For this non-tipping experiment, I made a variety of bets to see if
certain ones got botched more than others. My bets included the Pass line with Odds,
Place bets, and $1 proposition bets such as the Hardways. Sometimes, I didnt play the
Pass Line but then included the point in my Place bets (e.g., if the point was 6, I Placed all
the inside numbers including the 6).
Sure enough, I corrected the dealer twice about paying my Place bets on the point.
After he took the Dont Pass losers and paid all the Pass Line winners, he stood waiting
for the stickman to push the dice to the shooter for the next roll. I said politely, Same
bet, please, as a reminder to pay my Place bet on the point. He put my winnings in the
apron and didnt say a word. That happened twice in two hours with two different
dealers.
Another mistake that seemed to occur more frequently than it should was with my
Hardway bets. Several times in the two-hour session, a Hardway hit but they tried to pay
off the wrong player. I said politely, Thats my Hard four, please. The chips
mysteriously creped out of position inside the Hard 4 box and the stickman didnt
properly replace them. So, when the Hard 4 hit, they thought it was another players bet.
The dealer paid me only after the other player said it wasnt his bet. This sloppiness
occurred several times with different stickmen.
Later, I came back to the same table (but with a different crew); this time, giving a
tip every 15 minutes regardless of whether I was winning or losing. For this tipping
experiment, I made the same variety of bets to see if any would get overpaid more than
others. Every quarter-hour, I tossed a measly $1 chip to the stickman and said in a firm
voice so the entire crew could hear, Hard ten for the crew, please. That is, I made a
Hard 10 bet for the dealers. If it hit, the dealers would get the $7 winnings. Over the two-
hour period, I tossed in a $1 chip eight times. Something intriguing happened.
It didnt matter how little I bet for the dealers or that none of them hit. The simple
gesture of tossing a dollar on the table for the crew was all it took. I was overpaid three
times in that two-hour session. One time, instead of getting $12 for a winning $10 Odds
bet, I found an extra red chip in the payoff pile. Another time, a different dealer paid my
winning $10 Place bet with an extra red chip. Of the three overpayments, the boxman
caught only one of them (I had to toss back the overpaid red chip). Incidentally, none of
my own $1 Hardway bets inexplicably crept out of position as they did during my
previous non-tipping experiment. Coincidence?
For that two-hour period, I paid out $8 in tips (i.e., eight $1 bets on the Hard 10 for
the crew), but got $10 in overpayments (excluding the overpayment I had to give back),
for a net gain of $2. In other words, I made money by giving away money!
Dont get too excited. These mistakes dont happen all the time with every
dealer, but they do happen often enough to generally offset the money you give away for
tips. For example, one red-chip overpayment makes up for an hour of tipping.
I know what youre thinking and my answer is, No! Did I give back the
overpayments? Heck no! If you feel compelled, then by all means toss the overpayment
on the table and say, Uh, excuse me, you gave me too much on that last bet. Firstly, the
dealer probably wont like it because you called the boxmans attention to his mistake.
Secondly, the other players will probably laugh and call you a fool. In my opinion, there
are times that test your integrity and require honesty, and there are times when you should
keep your mouth shut. In these situations, I always shut my mouth.
When Should I Tip the Dealers?
You have two basic choices for when to tip: at the end of your session or during
your session. To make a tip at the end of your session, simply color up and toss your tip
in the center of the table and say, For the crew, thanks guys.
Obviously, the best method is to tip during your session, or as-you-go, because
the dealers will befriend you early, resulting in more fun for you and the potential for the
dealer to make mistakes in your favor.
I found that a good time to make your first tip is within the first five minutes. I
typically toss $4 to the center of the table and say, Two-way Hard ten. That is, a $2
Hard 10 bet for both the crew and me. Its amazing how that measly $4 investment gets
the crews attention and gratitude.
I typically toss in a $1 tip every 20 minutes whether Im winning or losing, which
equates to $3 per hour. Thats about what I spend in beer tips. (In most casinos across the
country, drinks are free when gambling, but you should give the waitress at least a $1 tip
per drink request.) But, as youll see in the next paragraph, I increase my tip amount
considerably during a hot roll. My philosophy is that everybody wins on a hot roll, even
the dealers.
How Should I Tip the Dealers?
You have two basic choices for how to tip: directly (i.e., a hand-in) or by
making a bet for the crew. To make a hand-in tip, simply toss in your chip(s) and say,
For the crew. One of the dealers picks it up, announces to the boxman that you gave the
tip, and then places it in the dealers tip box or on the side of the table. (The dealer
informs the boxman so the boxman doesnt think the dealer is sneaking casino money into
the tip box.) Then, to acknowledge your kindness, the entire crew says, Thank you, sir,
we appreciate it.
I prefer to tip by making bets for the crew because it tends to get the crew more
into the game, which makes it more fun for me. For example, during a hot roll, dealers
often get as excited as the players when they have several bets on the table. When those
dealer Hardways get pressed up to $50 each, you can bet the dealers juices are flowing.
For example, if all 16 players at the table continually add to a crews Hardway bet during
a hot roll, it doesnt take long for it to get to $50. At that level, the dealers sometimes
scream as loudly as the players.
Remember, tips are rewards for good service. If youre unfortunate to get a dealer
whos hung over and mad because his girlfriend just dumped him, you shouldnt tip
anything just for the sake of tipping.
Dealers have told me that they prefer Pass Line and Place bets over proposition
bets, but I stick with the Hardways out of habit. Theyd rather have a good chance of
winning a little than a poor chance of winning a lot. For example, the true odds of hitting
a Hard 4 are only 8:1 (i.e., true odds, not casino odds), which means the dealers expect to
hit only one out of nine Hard 4 bets. The true odds of hitting a Place 6 bet are 6:5, which
means they expect to hit this bet almost every other time.
If you make a Pass Line bet for the crew, put their chip next to yours on the Pass
Line and tell the dealer, This ones for you. If you win, be careful not to pick up the
dealers winnings. Ive seen players so excited about winning that they inadvertently pick
up the crews chips, too. The dealer usually says politely, Sir, I thought we had a bet
going for the dealers. The player realizes his mistake, tries to cover up his
embarrassment, and replaces the dealers chips on the table.
To reiterate, about every 20 minutes, I make a $1 Hardway bet for the crew only if
the service is good. As a hot roll develops, I increase my dealers Hardway bet. The
following scenario illustrates my tipping approach, where the chips go, and what happens
if the dealers Hardway bet hits.
1. A hot roll develops and I have all numbers covered with either the Pass Line or
Place bets. Assume the point is 9. The dealer service is good and I havent given a tip in
about 20 minutes, so Im due.
2. The shooter rolls a 4. My $5 Place 4 wins $9. I put $7 in my chip stack, then I
toss $2 to the center of the table and say, Two-way Hard ten, please.
3. The stickman says, Dealers are up on the Hard ten. Thank you very much for
the bet, sir. He places a $1 chip in the Hard 10 box in the appropriate spot that
distinguishes my bet from other players. He puts the other $1 chip in the center of the
Hard 10 box to identify it as a dealer bet.
4. The shooter rolls a 5. My $5 Place 5 wins $7. Time to press, so I tell the
dealer, Press it. The dealer takes $5 from my winnings and increases my Place 5 to $10,
and then puts the remaining $2 in the apron in front of me. I dont want to be bothered
with a couple of measly $1 chips (what a terrible attitude!), so I toss them to the stickman
and say, Press our Two-way Hard ten. The stickman announces to the crew, Yes, sir,
pressure on the Two-way is a bet. He puts a $1 chip on top of our original bets. Now,
we both have a $2 Hard 10 working.
5. The shooter rolls a 9 to make her point. While the dealer pays all the Pass Line
winners, the stickman asks me, Sir, are we off or on? I respond, Were both off on the
come-out. The dealer places an OFF button on my Hard 10 bet, which indicates that the
dealers Hard 10 is also off. The shooter rolls a 5 on the come-out, so the new point is 5.
6. I already have the 5 covered with a $10 Place bet, so I tell the dealer, Move
my five to the nine, please. Once again, I have all numbers covered by either the Pass
Line or Place bets. Since I called off my Hard 10 on the come-out, I have to tell the dealer
to turn it back on, Were back on. The dealer removes the OFF button from my Hard
10 bet.
7. The shooter rolls a 6. My $6 Place 6 wins $7. The dealer puts $7 in the apron
in front of me. I pick it up and put it in my chip stack, then toss another $2 to the
stickman and say, Bump our Two-way. The dealer increases of our Hard 10 bets by $1,
which brings them to $3 each.
8. The shooter rolls a 10 the hardway. Woohoo! My $5 Place 10 wins $9. The
dealer pays Pass Line bets first, then Come bets, then Place bets, and proposition bets last.
Its time to press, so when the dealer is ready to pay off my Place bet, I tell him, Buy it
for ten dollars. The dealer takes $5 from my winnings and adds it to my Place 10 bet,
moves my chips to the Buy section of the point box, and then puts a BUY button on them.
He puts the remaining $4 in the apron in front of me. I pick it up and put it in my chip
stack.
After the dealer pays off everyone elses Place bets, the stickman points with his
stick to my spot on the layout (i.e., directly in front of me) and says, Twenty-one dollars
for the Hard ten. The dealer puts $21 in the apron in front of me. I pick it up and put it
in my chip stack. Note that, although the stickman controls proposition bets, only the
dealer pays off winning bets to the players.
The stickman then says, And the dealers get twenty-one dollars plus three dollars,
and were down. Thank you, sir, very much for that wonderful bet. The dealer puts $24
in the Come area so the boxman can verify it, and then the dealer puts the chips in the tip
box or in the section of the table designated for dealer tips. Note that, in most casinos,
when a dealer bet wins, the bet is done and comes down. In this example, thats where the
$24 comes from: the $3 bet plus the $21 in winnings. The stickman again says, Dealers
are down on the Hard ten, usually as a reminder to the player that they no longer have a
bet working. They hope the player will put them back up with another bet. I always do,
but the amount depends on how much the bet was pressed before it hit. For example, if it
hit at $3, I toss in another $3 Hard 10 bet for the dealers. However, if it hit at $15, I
certainly dont toss in another $15. Instead, I might start them with a $5 bet and continue
pressing it as my Place bets continue hitting.
9. I continue pressing the Two-way Hardway as my Place bets continue hitting.

As I press and grow my Place bets, I also increase the amount that I press the Two-way
Hardway. For example, if my Place bets are so hefty that the payoff is in green and black
chips, I sometimes press the Two-way Hardway $5 each by tossing in two red chips.
Sometimes, I make a second Two-way Hardway bet (e.g., maybe a Two-way

Hard 4 in addition to the Two-way Hard 10). When Im winning, I tend to get a little
loose with my tips. I might give away $50 in dealer bets on a sizzling hot roll. Thats
okay because, when I get to the point of pressing dealer bets to that level, my chip stack is
full of black chips.
Chapter 13: Watch Your Bets and Payoffs 141
Chapter 13
Watch Your Bets and Payoffs
Most dealers are good in terms of skill, speed, and personality; however, theyre
human and make mistakes. You must get in the habit of paying attention to your chips on
the table.
Watch Your Bets
As noted in an earlier chapter, ensure you have the dealers attention before
putting your chips down for a non-self-service bet (i.e., a bet that the dealer makes for
you, such as Place, Buy, Lay, and proposition bets). When its crowded with lots of
action, patiently wait for the dealer to finish paying off winners and positioning other bets
before putting your money down.
Ideally, know what you want to do in advance and then be the first to act. Suppose
a new game is about to start and you plan to Place the 6 and 8 if the point is 4, 5, 9, or 10;
or Place the 5 and 9 if the point is 6 or 8. Get your chips ready in your hand before the
shooter picks up the dice. For this example, you need $12 ready in your hand (i.e., $12 to
Place the 6 and 8, or $10 to Place the 5 and 9). Be prepared so when the shooter rolls a
point, you immediately put the correct amount in the Come box and tell the dealer what
numbers to Place. Then, watch the dealer place your chips. Ensure he puts them on the
rights numbers and in the correct positions in the point boxes. After your Place bets are
properly positioned, its time to make your Odds bet (assuming you bet the Pass Line).
Now, watch all the slow, disorganized losers fumble with their chips trying to decide what
to do.
If the dealer doesnt immediately pick up and reposition your chips, wait a
moment until you can grab his attention, lean in and point to your chips, and tell him again
what you want. This is not the time to be shy. Ensure the dealer knows theyre your chips
and what you want him to do with them; otherwise, he may leave your chips in the Come
box thinking you made a Come bet. Sometimes, the dealer says, Yes, sir, I heard you.
When that happens, simply remain polite and say something positive, Sorry, I dont
know how you guys keep track of everything.
For Place and Come bets, learn to identify your bets on the layout. Your position
at the table determines where the dealer positions your chips on the layout. If youre a
novice, before you play your first game, stop at a dead table (i.e., an open table with only
few people playing) and ask an idle dealer to explain how she positions chips for Place
bets. For example, suppose you walk through the casino and see the craps tables ahead.
Theyre all $10 minimums. No way can you afford playing these tables, but before you
head for your favorite $3 table, take a minute to ask for help. Of the three active tables,
one has only two players and theyre both at the same end. Therefore, the dealer at the
other end is idle. Simply approach her and ask, Can you please explain where you put
Place bets so you know whose bets are whose?
Dont be afraid! The dealers are there to help players, especially newbies. They
wont yell or laugh at you. Instead, theyll be happy to show you how Place-bet chips are
positioned sequentially inside the point box corresponding to the sequential positioning of
players around the table. The same technique is used to position Come bets, Hardway
bets, and others. Easy as pie. Now, youre ready to head for your favorite $3 table.
Every few seconds, glance at your Place bets to ensure theyre still in the correct
positions within the point boxes. Occasionally (not often), youll find that your bet has
mysteriously moved. If your bets arent in their proper positions, dont be afraid to tell
the dealer which bets are yours. He should get the hint and then reposition them correctly.
Knowing your bet positions also helps keep track of what bets you have on the
table. Sometimes, you forget what bets you made (I forget all the time!). Instead of
sheepishly saying to the dealer, Hey, Joe, I cant remember if I have any numbers out
there, simply scan the layout for chips in your positions.
If the dealer doesnt see you make a Come bet, he usually asks whose chip it is.
Simply say, Thats my Come. For all subsequent Come bets, put your chips in the same
position in the Come box. If the dealer doesnt see you make those subsequent bets, he
assumes theyre yours because theyre always in the same spot. If he doesnt ask and then
positions a bet incorrectly in the point box, dont be afraid to tell him its your Come bet.
He should get the hint and reposition it properly.
Watch Your Payoffs
If your end of the table isnt full, a new dealer coming off break may incorrectly
read the layout and pay bets incorrectly. For example, suppose your end of the table has
five players. Yours is the only Place 6 bet on the layout. The shooter then rolls a 6. The
dealer has a good idea of whose Place bet it is by its position in the point box, so he puts
the $7 payoff in the apron directly in front of the player next to you. Immediately tell the
dealer, Thats my six. He moves the $7 to the apron directly in front of you and says,
Sorry, sir.
You must never be afraid to talk to the dealer. If youre wrong or say something
stupid, the dealer will politely correct you, at which time you politely respond, Im sorry,
Im still trying to figure out this crazy game.
When your Pass Line with Odds bets win, dont be in a hurry to pick up your
chips. First, wait for the dealer to finish paying other players next to you (i.e., dont
immediately reach down to grab your chips). The dealer typically leans over using two
hands to pay the Pass Line (a stack of red chips in one hand, a stack of white in another).
He doesnt need your impatient hands and arms in his way while hes paying other
players.
Watch your chips as the dealer pays your Pass Line. Does he pay the correct
amount? Sometimes (not often) a chip sticks to the bottom of one of his stacks, which
results in you getting shorted. Most of the time, the dealer catches it and makes the
correct payoff; however, the sticky chip error does occasionally occur. If you inform
the dealer while your chips are still on the table, its easy to for him to acknowledge the
error and fix it. If you pick up your chips and then notice the error, its much more
difficult to convince the dealer and boxman that you got shorted.
Occasionally, you might want to Place the point (i.e., make a Place bet on the
number thats the point). Suppose you approach a table with a game in progress where the
point is 8. You want immediate action and, because 8 is your lucky number, you put
down $6 and tell the dealer, Place the point, please. Instead of positioning your chips
on the back line of the Pass Line (indicating a Place bet on the point), the dealer moves
your chips to the point box like a normal Place bet. Pay particular attention if the shooter
then makes the point. After the dealer pays the Pass Line, he may forget and not notice
that you have a Place bet on the point and, therefore, not pay you (not all dealers are
always sharp and alert). Simply lean over and politely say, Same bet, or Press it,
depending on what you want. Hell get the hint and realize he missed paying your Place
bet on the point.
Sometimes, the dealer overpays, which is another reason for watching carefully as
the dealer pays your Pass Line. For me, this seems to occur most frequently when I tip. If
you see an extra red chip in your pile and the dealer doesnt pick it up before paying the
next player, I suggest reaching down and grabbing it as soon as possible before the
boxman catches the error. In this case, Im not too concerned with interrupting the
dealers rhythm of paying other players (but I still try to avoid getting in his way). My
goal is to get my chips before anyone notices the error.
You think, Youre a dishonest crook! (Is there such a thing as an honest crook?)
Youll eventually face this predicament, especially if you tip. Do you keep the
overpayment or do you give it back? I like to think my integrity is intact even after I keep
an overpayment. If someone drops a five-dollar-bill, I pick it up and return it instead of
putting it in my pocket. If a clerk gives me too much change at the store, I return it. I
dont even cheat on my taxes. But when it comes to overpayments at the craps table, Im
the exact opposite. I cant get that extra chip in my pocket fast enough.
Before you condemn me to hell, think about this. Your overpayment likely occurs
when you tip, which means the overpayment is likely a thank you from the dealers.
Your dilemma is whether to keep the chip or return it. If you return it, you basically put
the dealer on report to the boxman for making a mistake that could have cost the casino.
Although management understands mistakes happen, it wont matter much when its time
for the dealers performance review. Your honesty could embarrass the dealer (i.e., call
his mistake to the boxmans attention). Your honesty might even cost the dealer a 50-cent
raise at his next performance review. Therefore, I suggest keeping the overpayment and
keeping your mouth shut. I doubt youll go to hell for it.
Chapter 14: Ettiquette and Superstitions 144
Chapter 14
Etiquette and Superstitions
Unfortunately, a craps table is usually full of superstitious people. If you do or say

something against their silly beliefs, they sometimes give you dirty looks or verbally
abuse you. To help avoid embarrassment, ridicule, and possible vocal confrontations with
these people, learn their superstitions and practice craps etiquette. I know its foolish to
play along with peoples idiotic superstitions, but youll have much more fun at the table
if you do. Remember, fun is why we play the game; not to win money.
Dont forget to be nice to the dealers. Dont annoy them by throwing chips at
them, knocking over their chip stacks, or blaming them for your losses. If you piss off the
dealers, how can you maximize your fun? Besides, it just isnt nice. Your friendly
attitude will be infectious, soon making the whole table more fun. (Sounds like a good
time for another group hug and round of Kumbaya.)
Regardless of what so-called dice doctors and craps kings write on their
websites, theres no such thing as a sane craps superstition. One superstition isnt more
or less sound than another. Theyre all the same--silly. But you must heed them or the
idiots at the table who actually believe in them can make your time at the table miserable.
Respecting many of the idiots superstitions has matured into traditional protocol
at the craps table. Therefore, I blended superstitions and etiquette into one long list (no
particular order or distinction). It seems like a lot to remember, but as you gain
experience, it becomes easy as counting 1-2-3.
Know the rules. Understand the game before you start playing. Although the
dealers job is to be friendly and helpful, if you walk up to a crowded table and ask a
ga-zillion questions about the game, youll likely annoy everyone at the table, including
the dealers. When the table is crowded, they dont have time to teach you the game from
scratch. If youre a beginner, take what you learn from this book to an empty table where
the dealers have more time to help you. Find a casino that offers free craps lessons, which
are a great way to review the game basics and get a feel for how things work at a live
table.
Dont curse a player if he violates one of your nutty superstitions. You only make
yourself look ridiculous by accusing another player of causing a losing number to appear.
Your losses are no ones fault but yours.
A 7 will appear on the next roll if the dice leave the table. When a die leaves the
table, everyone shouts at once, Same dice! Its considered bad luck if the dice change
during a good roll. The boxman typically interrupts the game until a player or someone in
the pit recovers the lost die and gives it to the boxman. The boxman puts it back in play if
it passes his inspection.
A 7 will appear if the dice hit someones hand when thrown. Players frequently
shout, Watch your hands! when other players are late making bets. Know what bets you
want and make them while the stickman controls the dice. When he pushes them to the
shooter, its too late for you to bet, so dont reach down into the table area. When the
shooter rolls in your direction (i.e., the shooter is on the opposite end of the table rolling
the dice toward you), dont let your hands hang over the edge of the railing (the dice can
bounce up and hit them). If the dice hit any part of your body and then land on a 7, the
whole table blames you for the losing roll.
A 7 will appear if a player says seven during a game in progress. Dont say the
word seven. Instead, refer to it as the devil or the S word. Remember, never say
the S word because the dice might hear you!
Its bad luck if the stickman pushes the dice to the shooter with a 7 face up. Most
stickmen flip the dice to a number other than 7 before pushing them to the shooter. Some
stickmen flip the dice to match the point number. For example, if the point is 9, the dealer
flips the dice to any combination of 9 and then pushes them to the shooter. If a die rolls
while the stickman pushes them, he may retrieve them, flip them again to the point
number, and then push them to the shooter.
A 7 will appear if the dice hit a high chip stack. Dont aim for a chip stack at the
opposite end of the table. Dont aim for it because its bad luck, but rather because the
dealer has to fix the mess you make by scattering chips everywhere.
A 7 will appear if a normally strong shooter throws a weak roll. Suppose a shooter
has a consistently good roll (i.e., a toss where the dice miss the chips on the table, miss the
mirror, bounce once, hit the back wall, and stay on the table). Suppose that shooter
changes his style or accidentally hits his finger on the table before letting go of the dice,
causing one die to tumble pathetically across the table, barely making it to the back wall.
You can almost hear everyone at the table gasp as they watch that feeble attempt at a roll
result in a losing 7. Be consistent with your shooting style and try to avoid the accidental
weak roll. If you flub a roll and it results in a losing 7, the idiots will curse you for it.
First-time female players are lucky and will make lots of points and roll lots of
numbers. A woman player new to the table who hasnt rolled yet is called a female
virgin. Players tend to bet more when a female virgin is about to shoot.
Male virgins (i.e., first-time male shooters new to the table) are bad luck. Players
tend to slow down or stop betting altogether when a male virgin is about to shoot.
A 7 will appear if the dice hit new money on the table. Its bad luck if a new
player buys-in just as the shooter rolls and the dice hit the money. If youre new to the
table, dont buy-in until the stickman controls the dice in the middle of the table.
Its bad luck to be the first player at a new table, or the only player at a table. The
dice are cold and need warming up. Maybe if you blow on them or rub them vigorously,
theyll warm up faster. The dice like to feel warm and toasty before hitting your point for
you.
Its bad luck to speak to or touch the shooter during a hot roll. Your unlucky mojo
might transfer to the shooter. Its also bad luck to enter the shooters space during a hot
roll. Your unlucky spirit may pop the shooters lucky aura bubble.
Dont Pass bettors increase the chance of a 7-out. A Dont Pass bettors negative
telekinetic mojo persuades the dice to show the number 7. As more players bet the Dont
Pass, the negative mojo intensifies.
Dont forget your manners, even when losing. Dealers respect and appreciate
polite players. Please and thank you truly go a long way.
Dont get mad at a dealer if he makes a mistake. Politely inform him of it. If he
refuses to acknowledge it, politely explain the situation to the boxman. If the boxman
supports the dealer, and if youre sure a mistake was made, politely insist that someone
review the videotape. If the bet is small, the boxman may concede rather than go through
the trouble of viewing the tape. If you know youre right, dont let them bully you.
Dont criticize or deride a weak dealer (i.e., a dealer whos slow with chips or slow
calculating winning amounts). Its just rude.
Dont ridicule players who make stupid bets. If you absolutely must impart your
wisdom by acting the role of Master as hes enlightening Grasshopper Kwai Chang Caine,
then explain to poor Grasshopper why the odds for certain bets give him a better
advantage over the house. Have some class; dont tell him hes stupid in front of others.
Its okay to think that the guy is the dumbest born loser that ever walked the planet, but
dont say it aloud.
Dont root aloud for a 7 if you bet the Dont Pass. Most players play the Pass Line
and get downright pissed at those who play the Dont Pass. Even if you remain quiet and
motionless, you still get dirty looks. If you scream, Give me a seven! before the shooter
rolls, you might start a fight. If you scream, Yeah, baby, I love that seven! after a 7-out,
you might start a riot.
Roll the dice as described in detail in an earlier chapter of this book.
Dont throw your bets at the dealers or stickman, especially proposition bets.
Dont let your cigarette ashes drop onto the layout. Contrary to your selfish
inconsiderate thinking, the table isnt a gigantic ash tray. Lean back from the table and
then suck away. When not sucking it, put it in the ash tray on the shelf; dont hold it
between your fingers.
Dont blow your cigarette smoke toward the layout, dealers, or other players. Turn
your head up or turn completely around and then blow.
Dont smoke cigars at the table. They stink much worse than cigarettes. No one
thinks youre cool by sucking on a nasty cigar. Show some courtesy for the other players
and dealers.
Dont spill your drink on the layout. Keep your drink on the shelf below the rail.
Step or lean back from the table when you take a swig.
Dont try to hand anything, especially your buy-in money, directly to the dealer.
Dont constantly complain about everything. No one is at fault or to blame for
your losses except you. Your childish whining ruins everyone elses fun.
Dont forget to tip the dealers and waitresses.
Dont take your superstitions, your losses, or yourself so seriously that you spoil
your vacation.
Chapter 15: Wash Your Hands 148
Chapter 15
Wash Your Hands
Im still not quite sure why, but I felt compelled to include this brief chapter.
Casino chips are filthy! Disgustingly filthy. In terms of carrying disease germs,
theyre worse than money. The next time youre in a casino, take a few minutes to
observe how everyday people handle chips. Within minutes, youll understand why this
chapter is important even though it has little to do with craps.
The old guy to your left sniffles every other second. Suddenly, he inhales so hard
you think hes sucking out his own brains. He pulls out a handkerchief and blows his
nose like a fog horn. You cant help wondering if hes used that hanky the past three days
without washing it. You know its probably soaking wet with two-day-old snot. After
wiping his nose, mouth, and cheeks, he folds it neatly and jams it back into his pocket.
Then, he reaches down and starts fiddling with his chips. You think, Good grief, I hope I
dont win those chips.
The girl across the table from you coughs and hocks a loogey, but she courteously
covers her mouth. (Thank you, we appreciate that.) With the same hand she hacked on,
and without even wiping it on the side of her jeans, she grabs a few chips and drops them
in the Come box. You think, Good grief, I hope I dont win those chips.
The young guy at the end of the table, drunk as a skunk, picks his nose with his
finger buried two knuckles deep. He yanks out his finger, but youre too far away to
notice if he got anything. (Does it really matter whether he was successful?) He then
reaches for his chips to make another Pass Line bet. You think, Good grief, I hope I
dont win those chips.
Two guys next to the nose picker return from the bathroom. You know what that
means, right? According to studies performed by the Centers for Disease Control and
Prevention (CDC), only about two-thirds of American adults wash their hands after using
the bathroom. (Women wash significantly more often than men.) So, you figure one of
these guys probably didnt wash his hands after touching himself and the toilet (assuming
he flushed). They both grab a few chips and put them on the Pass Line. You think,
Good grief, I hope I dont win those chips.
The guy on the right of you gets a glob of mustard on his cheek while stuffing half
his hot dog down his throat. Of course, he doesnt have a napkin, so he wipes it off using
his finger. Then, he sucks and licks his finger clean. Sure enough, without wiping his
hand on his pants or shirt, he grabs some chips and tosses them to the stickman. You
think, Good grief, I hope I dont win those chips.
And then theres the familiar urban legend about the old geezer who craps in his
diaper (pun intended). (Ill pass this story along to you as it was passed to me. True or
not, it clearly makes the point.) The geezer is either too senile, too addicted to the game,
or too something to go change himself. Instead, he simply reaches down to adjust,
scratch, or whatever he does down there. Then, he fumbles with his chips and finally gets
several in his hand. By now, youre so sickened, you leave without coloring up. You
walk away thinking about the old geezer, Must be a sign from the craps gods that the
table has gone to shit. (Pun intended.)
The moral of all this is simple: wash your hands every chance you get. Wash them
properly. I always use a bathroom break as a chance to perform a two-minute surgical
scrub before returning to the table. After cashing out at the cage, I do another surgical
scrub. Additionally, while playing, I resist touching my face. I dont rub my eyes, I dont
scratch my nose, and I definitely dont eat at the craps table. When taking a swing of
beer, I grab the bottle near the bottom.
You think, This is a craps book, so why are you talking about personal hygiene?
Its simple...to save your vacation. If you handle lots of chips over a long period of time
and fail to wash your hands, the odds are greatly increased that youll wake up the next
morning with a sore throat or diarrhea. Who wants that during your long-awaited Vegas
vacation? Washing your hands reduces the odds of you getting sick. If more people are
conscious of their own hygiene and wash their hands, the odds of others getting sick are
also reduced.
The CDC tells us that failure to adequately wash hands is a major cause of
infectious diseases. The CDC says, The most important thing you can do to keep from
getting sick is to wash your hands. Hand washing can prevent common diseases like
colds and diarrhea, and more serious diseases like hepatitis A and meningitis. In one
study, children who washed their hands four times a day missed 51% fewer school days
because of stomach ailments and 24% fewer days due to respiratory illness (e.g., colds)
than those who washed less. Its clear that the simple act of washing hands can
significantly reduce the odds of getting sick.
So, please, do yourself a favor--wash your hands. Your vacation may depend
on it.
How to Wash Hands
Wash your hands vigorously for about 15 seconds by scrubbing with soapy water.
Soap combined with the friction from the rubbing action is what kills germs. Washing for
less than 15 seconds doesnt remove enough germs. Simply wetting your hands does
nothing to remove germs. You dont fool anyone by running water over your hands for a
couple of seconds, so why bother? You cant possibly be in such a hurry to get back to
the craps table that you cant spend a measly 15 seconds to wash properly.
Germs get underneath fingernails, so rub the tips of your fingers on your soapy
palm. Dont forget to wash the backs of your hands, too.
Rinse your hands well and completely dry them. Dont touch anything on your
way back to the craps table.
The most common way to catch a cold is to rub your nose or eyes after your hands
are contaminated. For example, suppose the old guy with a handkerchief blows his nose,
wipes it, stuffs the hanky into his pocket, and then puts a chip on the Pass Line. He
contaminated his hand by touching the hanky after blowing into it. He contaminated the
chip when he picked it up and put it on the Pass Line. Suppose the shooter throws a 7-out,
so the dealer then collects all the chips on the Pass Line. Suppose you win a bet during
the next game and the dealer pays you with the contaminated chip. When you pick it up,
your hand is now contaminated. You rub your itchy eye with your contaminated hand,
and now youre infected. Tomorrow morning, you wake up with a sore throat and your
vacation is ruined.
Casino chips are filthy, so wash your hands every chance you get.
Chapter 16: Craps Lingo 151
Chapter 16
Craps Lingo
Huh? What did he say? What does that mean? As a novice standing by the table
watching, too nervous to jump in, you give up trying to understand this wacky game.
Your Chinese language class in college was easier to understand than all this craps jargon.
So, you take your $100 and piss it away in a slot machine. Twenty minutes later, you
stare at the machine thinking, That was stupid. Why am I so afraid to play?
It shouldnt be like that. Craps is so easy and so much fun. Trust me; you dont
have to be a brain surgeon or math professor to play. Dont let your fear of the unknown
keep you away.
You dont have to speak craps fluently to play. You just need to know a few
words and phrases, which weve already covered throughout this book. As you play, your
command of the language will develop quickly. Use this chapter to familiarize yourself
with the lingo. Dont waste time trying to memorize every term before deciding to play.
Remember, if you dont understand something, just ask the dealer for help.
TERM DEFINITION
Aces Two ones. Snake eyes or eyeballs.
Action Bets that are in play or live. Also, how busy a table is.
Any Craps A bet that the next roll will be a 2, 3, or 12.
Any Seven A bet that the next roll will be a 7.
The outer edge of the table layout. The plain, unmarked area closest to
Apron
the player.
At Risk Cheques (money) that are in play or live.
The number 3. When a 3 shows, the opposite number (i.e., the number
on the bottom of the dice) is 11, which is down under. On dice, 1 is
Australian Yo opposite the 6, 2 is opposite the 5, and 3 is opposite the 4. So, when a
1-2 shows, the opposite side (i.e., the bottom of the dice, down under)
is 6-5.
Back Line The Dont Pass line.
The inside end of the table against which the shooter must roll the dice
Back Wall
for the roll to be considered valid.
Bank All the casinos cheque stacks on the table in front of the boxman.
TERM DEFINITION
A stack of cheques with a variety of denominations mixed together.
Barber Pole Cheques should be stacked with higher-denominations on the bottom
and lower-denominations on top.
Big Eight An even-money bet that an 8 will appear before a 7.
Big Red A bet that the next roll will be a 7 (same as Any Seven).
Big Six An even-money bet that a 6 will appear before a 7.
Black $100 cheques.
Bones The dice.
The plastic, wood, or metal bowl the stickman uses to hold unused
Bowl
dice.
The numbers 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, and 10 that can become a point on the
come-out roll. All other numbers (i.e., 2, 3, 7, 11, and 12) are called
Box Number
naturals because they result in a decision on the come-out roll. Also,
called point number.
The number 12. A bet that the next roll will be a 12. Also called
Boxcars
midnight.
The person supervising the game who sits between the two dealers
Boxman
and across from the stickman.
Boys, the The dealers.
Broke Money Money the casino gives a broke person for transportation home.
Brooklyn Forest Two threes. A Hard 6.
Buffalo A bet on all of the Hardways and the Any Seven.
Buffalo Yo A bet on all of the Hardways and the number 11.
An extra break for a dealer because the shift is overstaffed relative to
Bump
the number of tables/games in play.
A bet and paying a 5% vigorish (or tax) for the privilege of getting true
Buy
odds that a number will show before a 7.
C And E (C&E) Craps and Eleven. A bet that the next roll will be a 2, 3, 12, or 11.
The cashier. Where you exchange cheques for cash after you leave a
Cage
game.
Capped Dice Crooked dice.
The payoff odds that the casino pays when a player wins. Less than
Casino Odds
true odds; thereby, creating a house advantage.
What the dealer or player says when cash is dropped on the table as a
Change Only
buy-in.
A player keeping track of roll results using either paper and pencil or
Charting
the players cheques.
Cheques Chips with a denomination printed on them.
Chips Chips without a denomination printed on them.
Choppy When the table goes back and forth from making a point to a 7-out.
TERM DEFINITION
Cold Table When shooters arent making points.
From the casinos viewpoint, when a player exchanges low-
denomination cheques for high-denomination cheques. Typically just
Color In, Color Coming
before a player leaves the game so the casino knows how much was
In
won or lost, or so the player doesnt have to carry a lot of low-
denomination chips to the cage.
From the players viewpoint, when a player exchanges low-
denomination cheques for high-denomination cheques. Typically just
Color Out, Color Going
before a player leaves the game so the casino knows how much was
Out
won or lost, or so the player doesnt have to carry a lot of low-
denomination chips to the cage.
A bet thats the same as a Pass Line bet except made after a point is
Come
established.
Come-out Roll The first roll of a new game.
Short for complimentary. Free stuff the casino gives the players for
Comp their gambling action (e.g., drinks, show tickets, food vouchers, room
discounts).
Crap Out Rolling a 2, 3, or 12 on the come-out roll.
A rare layout variant where all numbers, except 7, can be rolled as the
Crapless Craps point. If a 2, 3, 12, or 11 is rolled on the come-out, it becomes the
point.
Craps The numbers 2, 3, 12.
Craps Is A Game Of
What the stickman might say if the shooter throws the dice too hard.
Skill Not Strength
Dead No players at a table.
Dealer The person responsible for all bets on his side of the table.
A roll that ends the game. If a natural is rolled on the come-out, an
Decision immediate decision is made. After a point is established, a decision is
made by rolling either the point number again or a 7.
When the stickman moves the dice to the center of the table after each
Dice Are In The Middle
roll. This is when players should make their bets.
Die In The Wood, Roll What the stickman might say when a die bounces and lands in the
No Good wooden chip rack on the rail.
Dime Two $5 cheques.
A bet the same as a Dont Pass bet except made after a point is
Dont Come
established.
Dont Pass A bet that the shooter will not make the point.
A free odds or true odds bet that is twice as large as the Flat Pass Line
Double Odds
or Flat Dont Pass bet.
Down Behind What the dealer says when a Dont bet loses.
E.T. A bet that the next roll will be an 11 or 12.
TERM DEFINITION
The number 4, 6, 8, or 10 rolled where the dice have different numbers.
Easyway
For example, an Easy 8 is 6-2, 2-6, 5-3, and 3-5.
Eighter From Decatur The number 8.
Eye In The Sky The video cameras on the ceiling. Surveillance of the game.
Eyeballs Two ones. Snake eyes or aces.
A bet that the next roll will be a 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 11, or 12. Sometimes the
Field
5 is included and the 9 excluded.
Fifty-yard Line The middle of the table.
Fill When the casinos bank (cheque stack) on the table is replenished.
Flat Bet The even-money Pass Line or Dont Pass bet.
Garden The field.
George A player who tips the dealers.
Green $25 cheques.
When the dealers have permission to hustle tips, or the pit crew isnt
Green Light
watching so dealers can hustle tips.
Hand-in A tip given directly to the dealers instead of being bet for them.
A bet on the 4, 6, 8, or 10 that wins if the dice show identical numbers
Hardway before a 7 or an Easyway. For example, a Hard 4 wins if the dice show
2-2.
Hedge Making one bet to protect another bet.
Hi-Lo A bet that the next roll will be a 2 or 12.
Hi-Lo-Yo A bet that the next roll will be a 2, 12, or 11.
Hit A Brick When a die hits a stack of chips and doesnt hit the back wall.
Hook Player positions at the table near the corner of each end.
Hop A bet that the next roll will be a specific combination of numbers.
Horn A bet that the next roll will be a 2, 3, 11, or 12.
A Horn bet with equal amounts on three numbers and a greater amount
on the fourth number. For example, a $5 Horn High Yo has $1 on the
Horn High
2, 3, and 12; and $2 on the 11. A $10 Horn High Boxcars has $2 on
the 2, 3, and 11; and $4 on the 12.
Hot Table Shooters are making points and rolling lots of numbers.
I Cant Read Her What the stickman might say when a die bounces and lands in the
Shes In The Cedar wooden chip rack on the rail.
Inside Numbers The numbers 6 and 8; sometimes the numbers 5, 6, 8, and 9.
Insurance Hedging one bet with another.
Jam Up A game is slowed or interrupted because of sloppy dealing.
A weak dealer who spills his stack of cheques or sloppily places
Jammer
players cheques.
TERM DEFINITION
The number 9. Jesse was shot by a .45. (The 4-5 dice combination is
Jesse James
a 9.)
Juice A vigorish.
Ladys Delight A Hard 10.
A small plastic marker, or button, placed on top of players bets to
Lammer
indicate whether theyre on or off.
A bet and paying a 5% vigorish (or tax) for the privilege of getting true
Lay
odds that a 7 will show before a number.
Laying Odds Adding a true Odds bet against the point on the Dont Pass.
Layout The table design and markings for all bets.
The plastic top that covers and protects the houses chip stack on the
Lid
table when the table is not in use.
What the stickman might say to remind dealers to move the puck to the
Lights Out
off (black) position.
Line The Pass Line.
Little Joe Two twos. A Hard 4.
Cash or bets that are in action or in play.
Live
Also, a George.
What the stickman might say to tell the shooter to get the dice to the
Long And Strong
back wall.
Marker The puck that marks the point.
Midnight The number twelve. Also called boxcars.
What the dealer might say when a player makes a bet by dropping
Money Plays
money on the table and calling out the bet.
Monster Roll A hot roll that lasts a long time on which players make lots of money.
Mop The stick the stickman uses to move the dice. Also called the whip.
The numbers 2, 3, 7, 11, and 12 that result in an immediate decision on
Natural
the come-out roll.
Nickel $5 cheques.
Nina From Pasadena The number 9.
What the dealer says if a player makes an invalid bet after the dice are
No Bet pushed to the shooter or after the dice are in the air. The bet is invalid
because its too late.
What the stickman says for an invalid roll (e.g., the dice dont hit the
No Roll
back wall or a die flies off the table).
Number In The What the stickman might say when a die bounces and lands in the
Lumber wooden chip rack on the rail.
Off A players bet is not live, not working, or not in action.
OJ The dice combination 3-2. (OJs jersey number was 32.)
TERM DEFINITION
On A players bet is live, working, or in action.
What the dealer might say to the boxman when a die that left the table
One On The Rail has been returned and placed in the rail next to the boxman ready for
his inspection.
One-eyed Chicken In
The dice combination 1-4.
The Weeds
Outside Numbers The numbers 4, 5, 9, and 10; sometimes only the numbers 4 and 10.
Ozzie And Harriet Two fours. A Hard 8.
Keep all your winnings in action by adding all the winnings of a
Parlay
particular bet to that original bet.
Pass Line A bet that the shooter will make the point.
Past Posting Making a bet after the dice have stopped rolling.
Penny $1 cheques.
Penny Any A $1 Any Craps bet.
Pips The dots on a die.
The area around which all tables are situated. Where the floor people
Pit
monitor the tables and employees.
A bet that a specific number (i.e., 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, or 10) will appear before
Place
a 7.
A casino club card issued to a player that the player uses while
Player Card gambling so the casino can track the players play for comp and other
business purposes.
Each players position at the table. Typically a maximum of eight
Player Position players per side. Positions are sequenced 1 through 8 starting at the
stickman and moving around the rail to the dealer.
The number that appears on the come-out roll, either a 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, or
Point 10. For a Pass Line bet, the shooter wins by rolling that same number
again before a 7.
The boxes for the numbers 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, and 10 in or around which
Point Box Place bets, Come bets, Dont Come bets, Buy bets, and Lay bets are
positioned.
Point Number A box number.
Press Double the bet.
Pressure To press a bet.
Proposition Bet A one-roll bet typically identified in the layout on the center of the table.
The plastic disk the dealers use to mark the point. The white side
Puck
reads on, the black side reads off.
Purple $500 cheques.
Quarter A $25 cheque.
TERM DEFINITION
The grooved rail around the edge of the table where players hold their
Rack
cheques.
Red Light Dealers arent allowed to hustle tips.
Rhythmic Roller A dice setter.
A player who bets with the dice (i.e., that the shooter will make a point
Right Bettor
before a 7). A Pass Line bettor.
Bets on the layout that the player makes himself without the dealers
Self-service
help (e.g., Pass Line, Field, Come).
When the shooter rolls a 7 after a point has been established to end the
Seven Out
game.
Shooter The player who rolls the dice.
Shooter On The Dark
A shooter betting the Dont Pass.
Side
A free Odds or true Odds bet equal to the Flat Pass Line or Flat Dont
Single Odds
Pass bet.
Skinny The same as Big Red or Any Seven.
Sleeper A bet that continues to parlay up because the player has left the table.
Slow Bleed A player losing his bankroll slowly but steadily.
Snake Eyes Eyeballs or aces.
Square Pair Two fours. A Hard 8.
Stacks Cheque stacks that the dealers use to pay off winning bets.
Stickperson The dealer who uses the mop (stick) and calls the action.
Stiff A player who doesnt tip the dealers.
Still Up What the dealer might say to remind a player that a bet is still live.
A player who hustles bets at the table or makes it difficult for the
Stroker
dealers to work the table.
Studio 54 The number 9.
Sweat The Money When floor people get nervous because the players are winning big.
A placard on each side of the table defining the table minimum bet,
Table Sign
maximum bet, and maximum odds allowed.
Taking Odds Adding a true Odds bet on the point behind the Pass Line.
When a dealer comes off break and returns to the table, he taps the
Tapping In
dealer that hes replacing.
Tidy The Bowl When the stickman aligns the extra dice in the bowl into a neat row.
What the dealer might say when a die lands on top of the casinos
Too Tall To Call
cheque stack or in the rack.
Toke A tip for the dealer.
TERM DEFINITION
A player temporary leaving the table (e.g., going to eat or to the
bathroom) may request that a cloth be placed over his cheques in the
Towel
rack to protect them until he returns. This holds the players position at
the table and prevents a new player from taking that position.
The mathematically correct odds of a number appearing compared to
True Odds
another number.
A small one-dealer craps table usually in small casinos. Also called a
Tub
mini-craps table.
When the stickman flips the dice with the mop (stick) to avoid pushing
Turn The Dice
them to the shooter with a particular number showing.
A bet for the player and the dealers. For example, a $2 Two-way Hard
Two-way
4 bet is a $1 Hard 4 for the player and a $1 Hard 4 for the dealers.
A 5% tax, or commission, the player pays the house for the privilege of
Vigorish
getting true odds. Also called a vig.
Wall The back wall.
We Need To Feed The
Chickens Not Kill What the stickman might say if the shooter throws the dice too hard.
Them
Weaki Weaki A roll that doesnt hit the back wall (Hawaiian).
Whip The mop (stick).
A bet in multiples of $5 that the next roll will be a 2, 3, 7, 11, or 12. For
Whirl each $5 bet, $1 is put on each of the five numbers. Also called a World
bet.
Working A players bet is on, live, or in play.
World A Whirl bet.
A player who bets against the dice (i.e., that the shooter will roll a 7
Wrong Bettor
before the point number). A Dont Pass bettor.
Yellow A $1,000 cheque.
When dealers should be careful about hustling tips because floor
Yellow Light
people may be watching.
Yo The number 11.
The number 11. Same as Yo. The stickman says yo to distinguish
Yo-leven eleven from seven so the players dont misunderstand the
stickmans call.

Secret To Craps Rev01 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Secret To Craps Rev01 PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

The Secret to Craps:

The Right Way to Play

William J. Enslen, Jr.

Chapter 1: Craps Math 101.............................................................................. 4

Chapter 2: The Crew........................................................................................ 11

Chapter 3: The Table and Equipment.............................................................. 14

Chapter 4: The Table Layout........................................................................... 17

Chapter 5: Approach the Table........................................................................ 20

Chapter 6: Roll the Dice.................................................................................. 26

Chapter 7: Dice Setting................................................................................... 31

Chapter 8: Basic Play and Types of Bets........................................................ 39

Chapter 9: Good Bet or Bad Bet?................................................................... 94

Chapter 10: The Secret to Craps..................................................................... 105

Chapter 11: Winning Systems (Hogwash!).................................................... 127

Chapter 13: Watch Your Bets and Payoffs..................................................... 141

Chapter 14: Etiquette and Superstitions......................................................... 144

Chapter 15: Wash Your Hands...................................................................... 148

Chapter 16: Craps Lingo................................................................................ 151

Figure 4-2. Craps Table Layout, Center Section............................................. 19

Figure 5-1. Player Positions............................................................................. 23

Figure 7-1. Pyramid Rubber on the Back Wall of the Table........................... 34

Figure 8-1. Flat Pass Line Bet......................................................................... 43

Figure 8-2. Pass Line with Odds Bets............................................................. 45

Figure 8-3. Right and Wrong Ways to Stack Chips........................................ 46

Figure 8-4. Location of the Dont Pass with Odds Bets................................. 52

Figure 8-5. Bridging the Dont Pass Odds Bet............................................ 55

Figure 8-6. Heeling the Dont Pass Odds Bet............................................. 56

Figure 8-7. Locations of Come Bets............................................................... 62

Figure 8-8. Locations of Dont Come Bets.................................................... 67

Figure 8-9. Locations of Place Bets............................................................... 72

Figure 8-10. Locations of Buy Bets............................................................... 81

Figure 8-11. Straddling the C&E Bet............................................................ 91

Table 1-1. Possible Two-Dice Combinations

Table 1-2a. Ways to Make a Number When Rolling Two Dice

Table 1-2b. Ways to Make a Number When Rolling Two Dice

Table 1-3a. Ways to Make a Number by Pairings

As you can see in Table 1-3a, the pairings are:

Table 1-3b. Ways to Make a Number by Pairings

Table 1-3c. Ways to Make a Number by Pairings

Boxman Dealer Apron

Dont Pass Bar

Figure 4-1. Craps Table Layout, Side Section

Figure 4-2. Craps Table Layout, Center Section

Dont Pass Bar

Figure 5-1. Player Positions

Drop Your Buy-in Money and Get Your Chips

Handle the dice with only one hand.

Back Wall Lined with Rubber

Padded Arm Rest Chip Rack Padded Arm Rest

Figure 7-1. Pyramid Rubber on the Back Wall of the Table

Total width (top to

Dont Pass Bar

$5 Flat Pass Line Bet

Figure 8-1. Flat Pass Line Bet

Dont Pass Bar

Figure 8-2. Pass Line with Odds Bets

Figure 8-3. Right and Wrong Ways to Stack Chips

Table 8-1. Examples of Odds Bet Amounts

5. The shooter rolls a 7 to end the game.

Dont Pass Bet

Dont Pass Bar

Figure 8-4. Location of the Dont Pass with Odds Bets

$12 Lay Odds Bet Bridged